285

Design Calc s Manual

  • Upload
    gustav

  • View
    84

  • Download
    9

Embed Size (px)

DESCRIPTION

design

Citation preview

Page 1: Design Calc s Manual
Page 2: Design Calc s Manual

CEI PRODUCTS

CEI’smission is to provide creative tools that empower our clients to excel in the welding andpressure vessel industry. Our expert knowledge bridges the gap between what budgets require andwhat safety demands. From pressure vessel design to welder continuity tracking to form submittal,our goal is to provide tools that make your job easier. Smart software, serious service – it’s what wedo.

i

Page 3: Design Calc s Manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CEI Products i

Data Browsers 1

Material Search 1

Material Selection 2

Pipe Search 4

Pipe Selection Grid 5

Tube Search 5

Tube Selection Grid 6

Bolt Search 7

Bolt Selection Grid 8

Gasket Search 8

Gasket Selection Grid 9

Selected Pipe is Larger than Necessary 10

Custom Data 11

Custom Material 11

Custom Pipe 12

Custom Tube 13

Custom Bolt 14

Custom Gasket 15

Shell / Tube (includes Jacket and Heat Exchanger Components) 17

General Info 17

Shell/Tube Material 18

Internal Pressure 20

External Pressure 22

MDMT/Misc. 23

Other Calculations 23

MDMT Reductions 23

MDMT 23

Head / Conical Reducer (includes Jacket and Heat Exchanger Components) 24

General Info 24

Vessel Info 24

Head/Reducer Material 25

ii

Page 4: Design Calc s Manual

Internal Pressure 27

Head/Reducer Design 28

Head/Reducer Dimensions 28

External Pressure 31

MDMT/Misc 32

Other Calculations 32

MDMT Reductions 32

MDMT 32

Designing an Eccentric Cone 33

Allowable Stress for Ellipsoidal and Torispherical Heads 33

Nozzle 34

General Info 34

Configuration 34

Nozzle Location 35

Design Info 37

Pressures 37

Opening Information 37

Nozzle Material 38

Nozzle Dimensions 39

Flange/MDMT 41

Other Calculations 41

MDMT Reductions 41

MDMT 42

Flange 1-7(b) Info 42

Area Info 43

Nozzle 43

Reinforcing Pad 43

Determining if UG-16 Applies to a Nozzle 46

Nozzle Troubleshooting 46

The value of E is incorrect in the nozzle thickness calculations 46

The value of E1 is incorrect in the nozzle thickness calculations 46

The Area of Reinforcement from the nozzle host is zero 46

Nozzle Planes of Reinforcement Methodology 47

StuddedOutlet 48

General Info 48

Outlet 49

Studded Outlet Material 49

iii

Page 5: Design Calc s Manual

Flange 51

Flange Dimensions 51

Bolting 52

Load and Bolt Calculations 52

MDMT 53

Other Calculations 53

MDMT Reductions 53

MDMT 53

Rated Flange (ASME Off the Shelf Flanges) 55

Rated Flange 55

Rated Flange Default Creation Settings Tips 57

Material Data 57

Default Settings 57

Flange Size 58

Flange Class 58

Rated Flange Information 58

Reference Notes 58

Flange Type 59

Material Group 60

ASME Class 60

Rated Flange Methodology 60

Determine Reference 61

Assign Material Group 61

Place Reference Notes 61

Determine M.A.P. 61

Determine Total Pressure 62

Compare Total Pressure and M.A.P. 62

Reference Check 62

Appendix 2 Flange 63

General Info 63

Pressure 64

Internal Pressure 64

External Pressure 65

Loads 65

Host/Flange 66

Flange Material 66

Host Information at Flange Location 68

iv

Page 6: Design Calc s Manual

Other Calculations 70

MDMT Reductions 70

MDMT 70

Gasket 71

Flange Neck Dimensions 71

Gasket and Facing Details 72

Load/Bolt Calcs 73

Bolting Material 73

Load and Bolt Calculations 74

Determining the Value of the Lever Arm on a Spherically Dished Cover 76

Reducing Number of Bolts Results in Flange Thickness Reduction 76

Stiffening Ring 77

General Info 77

Ring Stiffener Information 77

Design 79

Stiffener Information 79

Clamp 80

General Info 80

Hub 81

Hub Information 81

Hub Material 82

Clamp 83

Clamp Information 83

Clamp Material 83

Gasket 84

Bolting 85

Clamp Lug 85

Bolting Material 86

Stress Ratios 87

Component Order Troubleshooting 88

Component is in the wrong location 88

Component is unavailable 89

Tubesheet (Fixed, Floating, and U-Tube) 92

General 93

Shell 93

Shell Information 93

v

Page 7: Design Calc s Manual

Shell Material 95

Shell Band 96

Shell Band Information 96

Shell Band Material 96

Channel 97

Channel Information 97

Channel Material 98

Tube 99

Tube Information 99

Span 101

Expansion Ratio 101

Tube Material 102

Lanes 103

Untubed Lanes 103

Tubesheet 103

Tubesheet Information 103

Tubesheet Material 105

Floating 106

Floating Side Information 106

Floating Channel Material 108

Conditions 109

Grid Navigation 109

Tube/TS Joints 113

MDMT 114

Perform MDMT Calculations 114

Efficient Tubesheet Creation Tips 114

Tubesheet Troubleshooting 115

Incomplete Tubesheet 115

Failed Tubesheet 115

ThinWall Expansion Joint 119

General Info 119

Bellows 120

Bellows Information 120

Bellows Material 121

Convolution/Collar 123

Convolution Information 123

Collar Information 124

vi

Page 8: Design Calc s Manual

Collar Material 124

Shell 126

Shell Information 126

Shell Material 126

Displacement/MDMT 127

Displacement Information 127

Perform MDMT Calculations 128

MDMT 128

Conditions 129

Grid Navigation 129

Thick Wall Expansion Joint 130

General Info 130

Design Info 131

Design Info 131

Expansion Joint Material 132

Operating Info 134

Expansion Joint Material 134

Shell/Tube Info 136

Shell Information 136

Shell Band Information 137

Tube Information 138

MDMT/Other 139

Perform MDMT Calculations 139

MDMT 139

Requirements 140

Fatigue 140

Thick Walled Expansion Joint Methodology 140

Jacket Closure 142

General Info 142

Closure 142

Inner Vessel 142

Jacket 142

Closure 143

Material 144

Lifting Lug 146

General Information 146

vii

Page 9: Design Calc s Manual

Lug Location 147

Host Information 147

Lug Information 149

Lug Material 151

Repad Information 153

Repad Design Information 153

Repad Material 153

Saddle 156

General Information 156

Wear Plate/Top Flange 157

Wear Plate 157

Top Flange 159

Saddle Design 161

Saddle Material 162

Base Plate/Anchor Bolt 163

Base Plate 163

Anchor Bolt 165

Zick Stiffener 168

Stiffener Material 168

Leg 171

General Information 171

Leg Material 172

Leg Information 174

Leg Information 174

Base Plate/Bolt Information 175

Base Plate Design Information 175

Bolt Design Information 177

Repad Information 179

Repad Design Information 179

Supporting Lug / Supporting Ring 181

General Information 181

Lug Information 182

Lug Material 183

Bolt/Repad Information 185

Bolt Design Information 185

Repad Design Information 186

viii

Page 10: Design Calc s Manual

Skirt / Intermediate Support 189

Skirt/Intermediate Support Material 190

Base Ring 193

General Information 193

Configuration 193

Base Ring 194

Base Ring Material 195

Anchor Bolt 196

Anchor Bolt Material 197

Gusset/Compression 198

Gusset Information 198

Compression Plate Information 199

Designing a Base Ring Without a Skirt 199

Attaching Structural Elements 201

Base Ring 201

Intermediate Support 201

Leg 201

Lug - Lifting 201

Lug - Support 202

Saddle 202

Skirt 202

Support Ring 202

Designing a Structural Support for a Jacketed Vessel 203

Reports 204

Showing the Code Edition in the Report Footer 204

Reports Tutorial 204

Report Defaults 205

Cover Page 205

Footer Options 205

Company Information 205

Bill of Materials 206

Summary Report 206

Printing Reports 206

Report Troubleshooting: Report Fonts are Crowded 207

Windows 7/Vista 208

Windows XP 209

ix

Page 11: Design Calc s Manual

WRC-107 Analysis 212

General Info 212

Design Information 212

Vessel/Attachment 213

Vessel Information 213

Attachment Information 215

Loads 218

Loads 218

Repad 219

Stress Concentration Factors 219

WRC-107 Analysis Tips 220

Understanding the Pressure Stress Calculations in the DesignCalcs WRC-107 Implementation 223

General 223

Pressure Stress Calculation: Elliptical Host 223

Elliptical Host Pressure Stress vs. Elliptical Head Actual Stress 223

Cone to Cylinder Analysis 225

General Info 225

Design Information 225

Shell Information 225

Pressure/Load 226

For Internal Pressure 226

For External Pressure 226

Stiffening Ring 227

Ring Information 227

Stiffener Material 227

Specifying Loading Cases 229

UG-22 Loadings 232

Attachments/Loadings Tutorial 233

Attachments Tab 233

Vertical Vessel 234

Horizontal Vessel 235

Wind Tab 236

Vertical Vessel 237

Horizontal Vessel 237

Insulation Tab 238

Liquid Tab 239

x

Page 12: Design Calc s Manual

Vertical Vessel 240

Horizontal Vessel 240

Packing Tab 241

Seismic Methodology: ASCE 7-98 and Forward 242

Inputs: 242

ASCE 7-98 242

IBC 2000 242

ASCE 7-02 and IBC 2003 243

ASCE 7-05 and IBC 2006 and IBC 2009 and CBC 2010 244

ASCE 7-10 and IBC 2012 245

Math 246

References 254

Tower Analysis Methodology 262

Tower Analysis Basics 262

Definitions 262

Methodology 263

Review 264

Setting the Code Year for a Vessel 265

Changing the Support Data Path 266

The CEI Portal 267

License Troubleshooting 269

Software is running in Demo mode 269

Only part of the software is available/working 269

Software was working when launched but is now in Demo mode/not working 269

License key is plugged in locally but no licenses are visible 270

License key is plugged in locally but a "404" error appears when accessing the HASP™ Admin ControlCenter 270

Advanced Troubleshooting - HASP™ ACC configuration & Firewalls 270

File Extension Tips 272

DesignCalcs 272

DesignDocs 272

WeldDocs 272

WeldToolbox 273

Temporary Folder 273

xi

Page 13: Design Calc s Manual

1 | Page

DATA BROWSERS (return to Contents)

Material Search 1

Pipe Search 4

Tube Search 5

Bolt Search 7

Gasket Search 8

Selected Pipe is Larger than Necessary 10

Material Search

Materialsmay bemanually entered in DesignCalcs, however using theMaterial Search keeps thedata consistent and correct.Custom materialsmay be added to theMaterial Database and thenused within vessels and components.

When in a material field, click the Material Search button to load the material selectiondialog. The material selection dialog displays the most recent materials used in thecomponent as well as the materials most recently used in general. The selected materialdata and any custommaterials are also available.

Amaterial may be used by highlighting it on thematerial selection dialog and clicking theOK button.Other options for viewing and selectingmaterials are also available.

Opens a detailed view of the material information.

Launches the material selection window.

Page 14: Design Calc s Manual

Data Browsers

Material Selection

DesignCalcs has pre-matched the allowable stresses to yields and ultimate stresses. If a match foryield cannot be found, the software then tries to calculate the yield strength from the externalpressure charts per UG-28(c)(2) Step 3. If a match for ultimate cannot be found, the software thentries to calculate the ultimate strength using reverse logic based on theminimum tensile strength, thematerial table, the allowable stress and the safety factor explanations from the appendices in SC II,D.

Material Browser

Begin typing in any of the available fields and the data will be filtered tomatch the entered criteria.The grid displays all data that matches the characters that have been entered. Spelling andpunctuation errors will result in incorrect results. The incremental search is not case sensitive.

2 | Page

Page 15: Design Calc s Manual

Data Browsers

In the example above, the grid is showing all materials that have a SpecNumber that begins "SA-18", a TypeGrade that begins with "F3", and an Alloy/Desig./UNS Number that begins with "S31".Typing "sa-18" into the SpecNumber field would show the same results, however entering "sa 18"would not.

Grid Manipulation

Another way to quickly find a specificmaterial, or amaterial with certain properties, is to group, sort,and filter the grid data. Data can be grouped by any characteristic by dragging the column headerinto the area above the columns. Click on a column header to sort the data by that column in eitherascending or descending order. Click the arrow on the right side of a column header to select datafiltering criteria. Grouping, sorting, and filtering can be used in any combination.

The grid will retain any filters and the adjustments to column order and size. To reset the grid to theoriginal default appearance, right click and select "Reset Default Layout."

3 | Page

Page 16: Design Calc s Manual

Data Browsers

Youmay view thematerial information by right-clicking thematerial and selecting "ViewMaterial" from the context menu. One the desiredmaterial has been selected, clickOk.

Pipe Search

Pipesmay bemanually entered in DesignCalcs, however using the Pipe Search keeps the dataconsistent and correct.Custom pipesmay be added to the Pipe Database and then used withinvessels and components.

When on the internal pressure tab, click the Pipe Search button to load the pipe selectiondialog. Pipe entries from the ASME B36.10M reference will be available. User-createdcustom pipes are also available on the "Custom" tab of the pipe selection grid.

4 | Page

Page 17: Design Calc s Manual

Data Browsers

Pipe Selection Grid

To quickly find a specific pipe - or a pipe with certain properties - group, sort, and filter the grid data.Data can be grouped by any characteristic by dragging the column header into the area above thecolumns. Click on a column header to sort the data by that column in either ascending or descendingorder. Click the arrow on the right side of a column header to select data filtering criteria. Grouping,sorting, and filtering can be used in any combination.

The grid will retain any filters and the adjustments to column order and size. To reset the grid to theoriginal default appearance, right click and select "Reset Default Layout."

Tube Search

Tubesmay bemanually entered in DesignCalcs, however using the Tube Search keeps the dataconsistent and correct.Custom tubesmay be added to the Tube Database and then used withinvessels and components.

5 | Page

Page 18: Design Calc s Manual

Data Browsers

When creating a tube for a heat exchanger, click the Tube Search button on the internalpressure tab to load the tube selection dialog. Both standard and user-created customtubes are available.

Tube Selection Grid

To quickly find a specific tube - or a tube with certain properties - group, sort, and filter the grid data.Data can be grouped by any characteristic by dragging the column header into the area above thecolumns. Click on a column header to sort the data by that column in either ascending or descendingorder. Click the arrow on the right side of a column header to select data filtering criteria. Grouping,sorting, and filtering can be used in any combination.

The grid will retain any filters and the adjustments to column order and size. To reset the grid to theoriginal default appearance, right click and select "Reset Default Layout."

6 | Page

Page 19: Design Calc s Manual

Data Browsers

Bolt Search

Boltsmay bemanually entered in DesignCalcs, however using the Bolt Search keeps the dataconsistent and correct.Custom boltsmay be added to the Bolt Database and then used withinvessels and components.

When on the bolting or load/bolt calcs tab, click the Bolt Search button to load the boltselection dialog. Commonly available bolts are listed on the "Standard" tab. User-createdcustom bolts are also available on the "Custom" tab of the bolt selection grid.

7 | Page

Page 20: Design Calc s Manual

Data Browsers

Bolt Selection Grid

To quickly find a specific bolt - or a bolt with certain properties - group, sort, and filter the grid data.Data can be grouped by any characteristic by dragging the column header into the area above thecolumns. Click on a column header to sort the data by that column in either ascending or descendingorder. Click the arrow on the right side of a column header to select data filtering criteria. Grouping,sorting, and filtering can be used in any combination.

The grid will retain any filters and the adjustments to column order and size. To reset the grid to theoriginal default appearance, right click and select "Reset Default Layout."

Gasket Search

Gasketsmay bemanually entered in DesignCalcs, however using theGasket Search keeps thedata consistent and correct.Custom gasketsmay be added to the Gasket Database and then usedwithin vessels and components.

8 | Page

Page 21: Design Calc s Manual

Data Browsers

When on the gasket tab, click the Gasket Search button to load the gasket selectiondialog. Commonly available gaskets and gasket entries from Appendix 2 are listed on theStandard Gaskets tab. User-created custom gaskets are also available on the"Custom" tab of the gasket selection grid.

Gasket Selection Grid

To quickly find a specific gasket - or a gasket with certain properties - group, sort, and filter the griddata. Data can be grouped by any characteristic by dragging the column header into the area abovethe columns. Click on a column header to sort the data by that column in either ascending ordescending order. Click the arrow on the right side of a column header to select data filtering criteria.Grouping, sorting, and filtering can be used in any combination.

The grid will retain any filters and the adjustments to column order and size. To reset the grid to theoriginal default appearance, right click and select "Reset Default Layout."

9 | Page

Page 22: Design Calc s Manual

Data Browsers

Selected Pipe is Larger than Necessary

Occasionally, DesignCalcsmay appear to select a bigger pipe size than it should be whendetermining the thickness from Table UG-45. The code requires that the pipe size selected fordetermining the thickness be based on the outside diameter of the nozzle. If the nozzle diameter isbigger than the outside diameter listed for a specific NPS in ASME B36.10M, the next size pipe ischosen.

10 | Page

Page 23: Design Calc s Manual

11 | Page

CUSTOM DATA (return to Contents)

Custom Material 11

Custom Pipe 12

Custom Tube 13

Custom Bolt 14

Custom Gasket 15

Custom Material

DesignCalcs allows the use of user-created custom data. To add a custommaterial to the database,click the CustomData button on themain toolbar and select "Add/Edit CustomMaterial" from themenu. Custommaterial options can be accessed via the Custom tab on thematerial selection grid.

Page 24: Design Calc s Manual

Custom Data

The custom data grid presents the same grouping, sorting, and filtering options as thematerialselection grid. The custom data grid also presents the option to add a new material, edit an existingmaterial, copy an existingmaterial, or to delete an existingmaterial.

Each custommaterial may contain asmuch or as little data as the user prefers. Editing a custommaterial will not change the data in vessels that already use thematerial.

Custom Pipe

DesignCalcs allows the use of user-created custom data. To add a custom pipe to the database,click the CustomData button on themain toolbar and select "Add/Edit CustomPipe" from themenu.Custom pipe options can be accessed via the Custom tab on the pipe selection grid.

12 | Page

Page 25: Design Calc s Manual

Custom Data

The custom data grid presents the same grouping, sorting, and filtering options as the pipeselection grid. The custom data grid also presents the option to add a new pipe, edit an existingpipe, copy an existing pipe, or to delete an existing pipe.

Each custom pipemay contain asmuch or as little data as the user prefers. Editing a custom pipe willnot change the data in vessels that already use the pipe.

Custom Tube

DesignCalcs allows the use of user-created custom data. To add a custom tube to the database,click the CustomData button on themain toolbar and select "Add/Edit CustomTube" from themenu. Custom tube options can be accessed via the Custom tab on the tube selection grid.

13 | Page

Page 26: Design Calc s Manual

Custom Data

The custom data grid presents the same grouping, sorting, and filtering options as the tubeselection grid. The custom data grid also presents the option to add a new tube, edit an existingtube, copy an existing tube, or to delete an existing tube.

Each custom tubemay contain asmuch or as little data as the user prefers. Editing a custom tubewill not change the data in vessels that already use the tube.

Custom Bolt

DesignCalcs allows the use of user-created custom data. To add a custom bolt to the database, clickthe CustomData button on themain toolbar and select "Add/Edit CustomBolt" from themenu.Custom bolt options can be accessed via the Custom tab on the bolt selection grid.

14 | Page

Page 27: Design Calc s Manual

Custom Data

The custom data grid presents the same grouping, sorting, and filtering options as the boltselection grid. The custom data grid also presents the option to add a new bolt, edit an existingbolt, copy an existing bolt, or to delete an existing bolt.

Each custom bolt may contain asmuch or as little data as the user prefers. Editing a custom bolt willnot change the data in vessels that already use the bolt.

Custom Gasket

DesignCalcs allows the use of user-created custom data. To add a custom gasket to the database,click the CustomData button on themain toolbar and select "Add/Edit CustomGasket" from themenu. Custom gasket options can be accessed via the Custom tab on the gasket selection grid.

15 | Page

Page 28: Design Calc s Manual

Custom Data

The custom data grid presents the same grouping, sorting, and filtering options as the gasketselection grid. The custom data grid also presents the option to add a new gasket, edit an existinggasket, copy an existing gasket, or to delete an existing gasket.

Each custom gasket may contain asmuch or as little data as the user prefers. Editing a customgasket will not change the data in vessels that already use the gasket.

16 | Page

Page 29: Design Calc s Manual

17 | Page

SHELL / TUBE

( INCLUDES JACKET AND HEAT

EXCHANGER COMPONENTS ) (return to Contents)

General Info 17

Internal Pressure 20

External Pressure 22

MDMT/Misc. 23

General Info

Description:The label given for the component. It will appear in the component pane, the reportdialog, the summary pane, and at the top of the component report. This will default to the componenttype and component number. For example, the third nozzle for the vessel will start with a descriptionof Nozzle 3.

Drawing Number: The drawing number associated with the component. This does not refer to anydrawings that are generated in the software and it is listed here for the user's reference. It will defaultto the drawing number input on the vessel screen.

Mark: A shorthand reference for the component. It will also appear in the component report. Thedefault entry will be an abbreviation of the component type and the component number. Forexample, the second jacket shell for the vessel will start with amark SJ2.

Dist. from Ref. Line: Currently this field is not used in the software except for determining where todraw headswith a location of internal or other.

Page 30: Design Calc s Manual

Shell / Tube (includes Jacket and Heat Exchanger Components)

Shell/Tube Material

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

Modulus of Elasticity:Thematerial modulus of elasticity based on the TM tables fromSection II, PartD. The value shown here is based on the applicable TM table and the design temperature listed forthe internal pressure condition. In caseswhere the temperature listed for the internal pressurecondition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s TM table, the value will be zero.There are several materials that do not have clear matches in these tables. When a clear matchcannot be found by the software’s assignment criteria, the software will instead retrieve themodulusof elasticity from the external pressure chart assigned to thematerial. If this attempt also fails, thenthe value will be zero. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials. Manually editing this field willsever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

18 | Page

Page 31: Design Calc s Manual

Shell / Tube (includes Jacket and Heat Exchanger Components)

Stress (Hot):Thematerial allowable stress at the temperature listed for the internal pressurecondition. When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSectionII, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 forBolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength fromTable U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowablestress tables for yield and creep governed cases. In caseswhere the temperature listed for theinternal pressure condition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s stress line, thevalue will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the software that the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and the connection to thematerial in thedatabase will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Stress (Cold):Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specifiedin the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value iscalculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value islimited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Factor B table: The external pressure table assigned to thematerial in the allowable stress tables inSection II, Part D. The table is used to determine the external pressure strength of the componentand also the longitudinal compressive strength. Selecting a Factor B table other than the oneassigned to thematerial will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Yield Strength:Thematerial yield strength at the temperature listed for the internal pressurecondition. This value comes fromSection II, Part D, Table Y-1. In caseswhere the temperaturelisted for the internal pressure condition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’syield line, the value will be zero. There are several materials that do not have clear matches in thesetables. When a clear match cannot be found by the software’s assignment criteria, the software willcalculate the yield strength using the external pressure chart and themethod described in UG-28(c)(2) Step 3. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials. If nomatch is found and the softwarecannot perform the described calculation, this value will be zero. Manually editing this field will informthe software that the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database andthe connection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

19 | Page

Page 32: Design Calc s Manual

Shell / Tube (includes Jacket and Heat Exchanger Components)

Long. Factor A:This is the Factor A that is determined in Step 1 of UG-23(b)(2). Factor A isdetermined using the corroded dimensions. For pipe, this is based on nominal thickness as opposedtominimum thickness.

Long. Factor B:The allowable longitudinal compressive stress determined in Step 2 of UG-23(b)(2)as B. Factor B is determined at the temperature listed for the internal pressure condition. Note thatthis is not the same Factor B that is determined for external pressure strength; themodulus valuethat is sometimes used in these calculations is from the external pressure chart, not from the TMtables.

Internal Pressure

Use Diameter:This option is only available for some components. The user may choose to inputdimensions as the inside dimensions or the outside dimensionswhere this option is available. Forsome components (such as shell), the use of outside dimensions for internal pressure calculationsmay result in a slightly higher required thickness.

Solve For:This option is only available for some components. The user may choose to solve forthickness or for pressure where this option is available. The “Solve for Thickness” option ismorefavorable when doing nozzle calculations for nozzles that use the current component as host.

Pressure:The internal design pressure (pressure on the concave side). This value is gaugepressure. When “Solve for Thickness” is selected, this value is an input and should not include statichead.When “Solve for Pressure” is selected, this value is a result. In the latter case, it represents thetotal internal pressure (design pressure plus head) that the component can handle andmeet code inthe absence of any other loadings.

Static Head:The internal pressure (pressure on the concave side) resulting from the static head ofthe fluid. The user must determine this value and input it accordingly. It will be added to the Pressureinput and the sumwill be used in the internal pressure calculations for the component. This field willnot be present when “Solve for Thickness” is selected.

Temperature:Themaximummeanmetal design temperature for the internal pressure case asdefined in UG-20(a).

20 | Page

Page 33: Design Calc s Manual

Shell / Tube (includes Jacket and Heat Exchanger Components)

Length:The length of the shell component. If this component representsmultiple shell courses,make sure that this length is the total length of the shell courses that are attached end to end.

Diameter:The component diameter in the new condition. The selection in the “Use Diameter” areadetermineswhether this is the inside or outside diameter of the component. In the context of curvedheads, this value is specifically the skirt diameter. For circular flat heads, this is the diameter asdefined in per the configuration in UG-34.

Inside CA:Corrosion allowance on the inside of the component (concave side).

Circ. Joint Efficiency:The joint efficiency of the circumferential joints (girth seams) in the shellcomponent. This is determined from Table UW-12 for welded joints. Thismay also representcircumferential ligament efficiency per UG-53.When both ligaments and welded joints exist, thelowest efficiency is used. See Appendix L for further help in determining the efficiency.

Long. Joint Efficiency:The joint efficiency of the longitudinal joints (long seams) in the shellcomponent. This is determined from Table UW-12 for welded joints. Thismay also representlongitudinal ligament efficiency per UG-53.When both ligaments and welded joints exist, the lowestefficiency is used. See Appendix L for further help in determining the efficiency.

Joint Efficiency Calculator:Click the button next to the field to calculate. If the inputs return alogical value per UW-12, the joint efficiency will be displayed in the calculator. To apply thisvalue to the field, selectOk. The value in the field can be manually entered even after usingthis calculator.

Quantity:The number of tubes that this component represents. This field is only available for the tubecomponent.

External CA:Corrosion allowance on the outside of the component (convex side). This field isavailable for internal heads and for the inner components of a jacketed vessel.

21 | Page

Page 34: Design Calc s Manual

Shell / Tube (includes Jacket and Heat Exchanger Components)

The following fields are not used by this software; they are listed here for the convenience offilling out the data forms inDesignDocs and FormPro.

Radiography (Circ.):This field represents the degree of radiography performed on thecircumferential joints (girth seams). See UW-11 for more information.

Joint type (Circ.):This field represents the joint type for the circumferential joints (girth seams) inthe shell. See Table UW-12 for more information.

Radiography (Long.):This field represents the degree of radiography performed on thelongitudinal joints (long seams). See UW-11 for more information.

Joint Type (Long.):This field represents the joint type for the circumferential joints (girth seams) inthe shell. See Table UW-12 for more information.

Heat Treatment Temperature:ReviewSubsection C of Section VIII, Division 1 to better determinethe required heat treatment temperature for your component and material.

Heat Treatment Time:ReviewSubsection C of Section VIII, Division 1 to better determine therequired heat treatment time for your component and material.

Nominal t:This value is in the new condition. For the component to pass, this valuemust be at leastthe sum of the thickness necessary for pressure and temperature, corrosion allowances, andforming allowances or under-tolerances. If the thickness necessary for pressure and temperature isless than the thickness required byUG-16, the nominal thicknessmust be at least the sum of theUG-16 thickness and the tolerances, etc. In some cases, under-tolerance is not considered (e.g., fornozzle reinforcement, the under-tolerance of the nozzle neck is ignored). When “Solve forThickness” is selected, the software will determine the smallest standard size that passes. The useris able tomanually edit this value.

External Pressure

Design Pa:The external design pressure (pressure on the convex side). This value is gaugepressure. If the user wishes to consider the effect of static head for the external pressure case, thisinput must be altered to consider the effect.

L:The un-stiffened length for the shell component. See UG-28(b) and Figure 28.1 for moreinformation. This valuemay be greater than the length of the shell itself.

External Temperature:Themaximummeanmetal design temperature for the external pressure caseas defined in UG-20(a).

22 | Page

Page 35: Design Calc s Manual

Shell / Tube (includes Jacket and Heat Exchanger Components)

MDMT/Misc.

Other Calculations

Perform UCS-66 calculations: Selecting this check boxwill cause the software to performUCS-66toughness calculations on the component. This option is only available tomaterials that are classifiedasUCSmaterials per Table UCS-23.

Exemption Drop-down:WhenUCS-66 calculationswill not be performed (the software will not allowthese calculationswhen a non-UCSmaterial is used), an exemptionmust be entered. Theexemptionmay be typed in or selected from the drop-down options, but the user is responsible forensuring that the exemption selected is valid for thematerial, service, etc., in question.

MDMT Reductions

Take UCS-66(b) Reduction:Selecting this check boxwill take advantage of the reduction in allowedMDMT per UCS-66(b). This paragraph includes a calculation for the component whichcompensates for any excessmaterial thickness in the component.

Apply UCS-68(c):Selecting this check boxwill give an additional flat reduction in the allowedMDMTper UCS-68(c). Carefully review this paragraph as there are steep requirements for this exemption.

MDMT

MDMT Pressure:The net internal pressure (concave side) on the component coincident with theminimumdesignmetal temperature (MDMT). This includes static head.

MDMT Curve:The notes in Figure UCS-66 provide the criteria to assign theMDMT curve to thematerial and product form of the component. Curve A will give the least favorable allowedMDMTandCurve D will give themost favorable allowedMDMT.WhenUCSmaterials do not have a clearmatch using the criteria, they are assigned a conservative value of A. As the software cannotcurrently obtain possible improvements in curve rating due to heat treatment and other factors, theuser may override the curve value.

23 | Page

Page 36: Design Calc s Manual

24 | Page

HEAD / CONICAL REDUCER

( INCLUDES JACKET AND HEAT

EXCHANGER COMPONENTS ) (return to Contents)

General Info 24

Internal Pressure 27

External Pressure 31

MDMT/Misc 32

Designing an Eccentric Cone 33

Allowable Stress for Ellipsoidal and Torispherical Heads 33

General Info

Vessel Info

Description:The label given for the component. It will appear in the component pane, the reportdialog, the summary pane, and at the top of the component report. This will default to the componenttype and component number. For example, the third nozzle for the vessel will start with a descriptionof Nozzle 3.

Drawing Number: The drawing number associated with the component. This does not refer to anydrawings that are generated in the software and it is listed here for the user's reference. It will defaultto the drawing number input on the vessel screen.

Mark: A shorthand reference for the component. It will also appear in the component report. Thedefault entry will be an abbreviation of the component type and the component number. Forexample, the second jacket shell for the vessel will start with amark SJ2.

Page 37: Design Calc s Manual

Head / Conical Reducer (includes Jacket and Heat Exchanger Components)

Dist. from Ref. Line: Currently this field is not used in the software except for determining where todraw headswith a location of internal or other.

Type: There are several head types in the software (e.g., Hemispherical, Ellipsoidal, Toriconical).Once the component has been saved, the head type can no longer be changed.

Location:Defineswhere the head is placed in the vessel. Horizontal vessels have the option of Left,Right, Internal, andOther. Vertical vessels have the option of Bottom, Top, Internal, andOther. Onlyone headmay be the Left, Right, Top, or Bottom head (e.g., theremay be one left head and oneright head but not two left heads).

Curve Direction:This field is only available to headswith a curvature. “Curve out” means that theconcave side of the head is on the inside of the vessel; “Curve in” means that the convex side of thehead is on the inside of the vessel. The internal pressure input for the head is always considered tobe on the concave side of the head and the external pressure input for the head is intended for theconvex side of the head.

Configuration:This field is only available for Flat head types and it affects the design equations.Review UG-34 for more information.

Head/Reducer Material

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

25 | Page

Page 38: Design Calc s Manual

Head / Conical Reducer (includes Jacket and Heat Exchanger Components)

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

Modulus of Elasticity:Thematerial modulus of elasticity based on the TM tables fromSection II, PartD. The value shown here is based on the applicable TM table and the design temperature listed forthe internal pressure condition. In caseswhere the temperature listed for the internal pressurecondition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s TM table, the value will be zero.There are several materials that do not have clear matches in these tables. When a clear matchcannot be found by the software’s assignment criteria, the software will instead retrieve themodulusof elasticity from the external pressure chart assigned to thematerial. If this attempt also fails, thenthe value will be zero. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials. Manually editing this field willsever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Stress (Hot):Thematerial allowable stress at the temperature listed for the internal pressurecondition. When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSectionII, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 forBolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength fromTable U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowablestress tables for yield and creep governed cases. In caseswhere the temperature listed for theinternal pressure condition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s stress line, thevalue will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the software that the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and the connection to thematerial in thedatabase will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Stress (Cold):Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specifiedin the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value iscalculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value islimited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

26 | Page

Page 39: Design Calc s Manual

Head / Conical Reducer (includes Jacket and Heat Exchanger Components)

Factor B table: The external pressure table assigned to thematerial in the allowable stress tables inSection II, Part D. The table is used to determine the external pressure strength of the componentand also the longitudinal compressive strength. Selecting a Factor B table other than the oneassigned to thematerial will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Yield Strength:Thematerial yield strength at the temperature listed for the internal pressurecondition. This value comes fromSection II, Part D, Table Y-1. In caseswhere the temperaturelisted for the internal pressure condition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’syield line, the value will be zero. There are several materials that do not have clear matches in thesetables. When a clear match cannot be found by the software’s assignment criteria, the software willcalculate the yield strength using the external pressure chart and themethod described in UG-28(c)(2) Step 3. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials. If nomatch is found and the softwarecannot perform the described calculation, this value will be zero. Manually editing this field will informthe software that the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database andthe connection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Long. Factor A:This is the Factor A that is determined in Step 1 of UG-23(b)(2). Factor A isdetermined using the corroded dimensions. For pipe, this is based on nominal thickness as opposedtominimum thickness.

Long. Factor B:The allowable longitudinal compressive stress determined in Step 2 of UG-23(b)(2)as B. Factor B is determined at the temperature listed for the internal pressure condition. Note thatthis is not the same Factor B that is determined for external pressure strength; themodulus valuethat is sometimes used in these calculations is from the external pressure chart, not from the TMtables.

Internal Pressure

Use Diameter:This option is only available for some components. The user may choose to inputdimensions as the inside dimensions or the outside dimensionswhere this option is available. Forsome components (such as shell), the use of outside dimensions for internal pressure calculationsmay result in a slightly higher required thickness.

27 | Page

Page 40: Design Calc s Manual

Head / Conical Reducer (includes Jacket and Heat Exchanger Components)

Solve For:This option is only available for some components. The user may choose to solve forthickness or for pressure where this option is available. The “Solve for Thickness” option ismorefavorable when doing nozzle calculations for nozzles that use the current component as host.

Head/Reducer Design

Pressure:The internal design pressure (pressure on the concave side). This value is gaugepressure. When “Solve for Thickness” is selected, this value is an input and should not include statichead.When “Solve for Pressure” is selected, this value is a result. In the latter case, it represents thetotal internal pressure (design pressure plus head) that the component can handle andmeet code inthe absence of any other loadings.

Static Head:The internal pressure (pressure on the concave side) resulting from the static head ofthe fluid. The user must determine this value and input it accordingly. It will be added to the Pressureinput and the sumwill be used in the internal pressure calculations for the component. This field willnot be present when “Solve for Pressure" is selected.

Temperature:Themaximummeanmetal design temperature for the internal pressure case asdefined in UG-20(a).

The following fields are not used by this software; they are listed here for the convenience offilling out the data forms inDesignDocs and FormPro.

Radiography:This field represents the degree of radiography performed on the joints. See UW-11 for more information.

Joint type:This field represents the joint type for the joints. See Table UW-12 for moreinformation.

Is an inner head:Select the check box to indicate the entire head (both the concave and convexsides) is in the interior of the vessel.

Head/Reducer Dimensions

Diameter:The component diameter in the new condition. The selection in the “Use Diameter” areadetermineswhether this is the inside or outside diameter of the component. In the context of curvedheads, this value is specifically the skirt diameter. For circular flat heads, this is the diameter asdefined in per the configuration in UG-34.

28 | Page

Page 41: Design Calc s Manual

Head / Conical Reducer (includes Jacket and Heat Exchanger Components)

Long Span: This field is only available for the Non-circular Flat head type. These head types aremore specifically considered rectangular and this represents the long side of that head.

Inside CA:Corrosion allowance on the inside of the component (concave side).

External CA:Corrosion allowance on the outside of the component (convex side). This field isavailable for internal heads and for the inner components of a jacketed vessel.

Efficiency:The joint efficiency of the component, which is determined from Table UW-12 for weldedjoints andmay also represent ligament efficiency per UG-53.When both ligaments and welded jointsexist, the lowest efficiency is used. See Appendix L for further help in determining the efficiency.

Crown Radius:The component crown radius in the new condition. The selection in the “UseDiameter” area determineswhether this is the inside or outside crown radius. This field is onlyavailable for heads that have a crown or spherical portion – ASME F & D, Torispherical,Hemispherical, and Dish Cover. If the head type is ASME F & D, the value will be locked to the“Diameter” field to meet the dimension requirements of UG-32. If the head type is Torispherical, thevalue will default based on the settings under Tools > Defaults.

Dimension h/ho:The dished head depth in the new condition of an elliptical head. The selection inthe “Use Diameter” area determineswhether this is the inside or outside head depth. This field isonly available for elliptical heads. The head depth will default based on the “Diameter” field so thatthe inside dimensions have a ratio of D/2h = 2.0. This ratio is based on the new inside dimensions.

Cone Height:The axial length of a cone. This field is algebraically connected to the “Diameter”,“Small End Diameter”, and “Cone Angle” fields. Entering the “Cone Angle” will solve for the “ConeHeight”; entering the “Cone Height” will solve for the “Cone Angle.”

Cone Angle:The half-apex angle (half of the included angle) of the cone. This field is algebraicallyconnected to the “Diameter”, “Small End Diameter”, and “Cone Height” fields. Entering the “ConeAngle” will solve for the “Cone Height”; entering the “Cone Height” will solve for the “Cone Angle.”

Knuckle Radius:The component inside knuckle radius in the new condition. This field is onlyavailable for heads that have a knuckle region: ASME F & D, Torispherical, and Toriconical.

29 | Page

Page 42: Design Calc s Manual

Head / Conical Reducer (includes Jacket and Heat Exchanger Components)

Large End Diameter:The large end inside diameter of the conical section of a toriconical head in thenew condition. See dimension Di in Figure 1-4 (sketch e) for more information.

Small End Diameter:The diameter of the cone’s small end in the new condition. The selection in the“Use Diameter” area determineswhether this is the inside or outside diameter at the small end.

Dimension L:This value is only for toriconical heads and is a displayed value that is not available forinput. This value is what the inside crown radius (new condition) would be if a crown existed in placeof a conical section at the end of the knuckle.

Short Span:This field is only available for the Non-circular Flat head type. These head types aremore specifically considered rectangular and this represents the short side of that head.

Maximum Pitch:This field is only available for the Braced, Stayed head type. The pitch is thedistance between any two adjacent stays. Themaximumpitch is the largest value from the collectionof pitches.

Factor C:This field is only available for Flat; Non-circular Flat; and Braced, Stayed head types. Thedefault value is based on the head type and configuration selected, however the user may be able tochange it to better advantage. Review the sketches in UG-34 for more information.

Factor M:This is a displayed value that is not available for input. This value is used in the head designcalculations for heads that have a knuckle (ASME F & D, Torispherical, and Toriconical). SeeAppendix 1-4 for more information.

Factor K:This is a displayed value that is not available for input. This value is used in the head designcalculations for elliptical heads. See Appendix 1-4 for more information.

Thin Out:Thematerial thickness lost to the forming process. To determine theminimum thicknessafter forming, the un-corroded nominal thickness is reduced by this amount. When an ellipsoidalhead is used tomake a pipe cap, this field is replaced with a 12-1/2% undertolerance field.

30 | Page

Page 43: Design Calc s Manual

Head / Conical Reducer (includes Jacket and Heat Exchanger Components)

12 ½% Pipe:The thickness that represents the 12-1/2% undertolerance of a pipe cap. For this field tobe visible, the user must create a pipe cap by selecting an Elliptical head type and using the PipeSearch. This is a calculated value and is not available for input. When a pipe cap is not beingmade,this field is replaced with the "Thin Out" field.

Straight Flange:The length of the cylindrical straight flange of the head. Straight flange calculationsare not performed automatically; a shell must be created to run calculations on the straight flange.

Include thinout in 1-4(e):This option is only available for toriconical heads. Toriconical heads havetwo design equations for thickness (for internal pressure): 1-4(d) for the knuckle and 1-4(e) for theconical section. Thin Out is automatically considered in the former equation; this boxmust beselected for it to be considered in the latter equation aswell.

Nominal t:This value is in the new condition. For the component to pass, this valuemust be at leastthe sum of the thickness necessary for pressure and temperature, corrosion allowances, andforming allowances or under-tolerances. If the thickness necessary for pressure and temperature isless than the thickness required byUG-16, the nominal thicknessmust be at least the sum of theUG-16 thickness and the tolerances, etc. In some cases, under-tolerance is not considered (e.g., fornozzle reinforcement, the under-tolerance of the nozzle neck is ignored). When “Solve forThickness” is selected, the software will determine the smallest standard size that passes. The useris able tomanually edit this value.

External Pressure

Design Pa:The external design pressure (pressure on the convex side). This value is gaugepressure. If the user wishes to consider the effect of static head for the external pressure case, thisinput must be altered to consider the effect.

External Temperature:Themaximummeanmetal design temperature for the external pressure caseas defined in UG-20(a).

31 | Page

Page 44: Design Calc s Manual

Head / Conical Reducer (includes Jacket and Heat Exchanger Components)

MDMT/Misc

Other Calculations

Perform UCS-66 calculations: Selecting this check boxwill cause the software to performUCS-66toughness calculations on the component. This option is only available tomaterials that are classifiedasUCSmaterials per Table UCS-23.

Exemption Drop-down:WhenUCS-66 calculationswill not be performed (the software will not allowthese calculationswhen a non-UCSmaterial is used), an exemptionmust be entered. Theexemptionmay be typed in or selected from the drop-down options, but the user is responsible forensuring that the exemption selected is valid for thematerial, service, etc., in question.

MDMT Reductions

Take UCS-66(b) Reduction:Selecting this check boxwill take advantage of the reduction in allowedMDMT per UCS-66(b). This paragraph includes a calculation for the component whichcompensates for any excessmaterial thickness in the component.

Apply UCS-68(c):Selecting this check boxwill give an additional flat reduction in the allowedMDMTper UCS-68(c). Carefully review this paragraph as there are steep requirements for this exemption.

MDMT

MDMT Pressure:The net internal pressure (concave side) on the component coincident with theminimumdesignmetal temperature (MDMT). This includes static head.

MDMT Curve:The notes in Figure UCS-66 provide the criteria to assign theMDMT curve to thematerial and product form of the component. Curve A will give the least favorable allowedMDMTandCurve D will give themost favorable allowedMDMT.WhenUCSmaterials do not have a clearmatch using the criteria, they are assigned a conservative value of A. As the software cannotcurrently obtain possible improvements in curve rating due to heat treatment and other factors, theuser may override the curve value.

32 | Page

Page 45: Design Calc s Manual

Head / Conical Reducer (includes Jacket and Heat Exchanger Components)

Designing an Eccentric Cone

DesignCalcs does not directly cover eccentric cones. If you want to perform calculations for aneccentric cone (flat on a side with the slope on the other side), per Code this cone can use an angleup to 30 °. With no angle on one side and a 30° angle on the other, the cone and cone-to-cylinderjunction need to be designed with a 30° angle.

However, if you are performing a vacuum design, do not treat the junction as a line of support. Thesharper angle will make passing the calculations easier, though it alsomakes passing basicthickness calculationsmore difficult.

Allowable Stress for Ellipsoidal and Torispherical Heads

When you are designing torispherical heads (and certain ellipsoidal heads) using a high tensilestrengthmaterial, DesignCalcs will flag the design, noting "Appendix 1-4 Footnote Applies" on thereport.

When this occurs, the allowable stress fromSC II, D is replaced with an S value that is determined

as 20, 000 ×

S

S

d

a for Customary units and138 ×

S

S

d

a for metric units, where Sd is thematerial SCII, D allowable stress at design temperature and Sa is the SC II, D allowable stress at roomtemperature.

The S value will be replaced in the thickness calculations.

The code penalizes the allowable stress due to the high stress concentrations in the knuckle region.20,000 psi is the correct allowable stress to use in this situation per the code paragraph listed.

33 | Page

Page 46: Design Calc s Manual

34 | Page

NOZZLE (return to Contents)

General Info 34

Design Info 37

Flange/MDMT 41

Area Info 43

Determining if UG-16 Applies to a Nozzle 46

Nozzle Troubleshooting 46

Nozzle Planes of Reinforcement Methodology 47

General Info

Configuration

Description:The label given for the component. It will appear in the component pane, the reportdialog, the summary pane, and at the top of the component report. This will default to the componenttype and component number. For example, the third nozzle for the vessel will start with a descriptionof Nozzle 3.

Nozzle Purpose:Select a nozzle type from the drop-downmenu or type one into the field. This isincluded for the user's reference and does not affect the calculations in the software.

Mark: A shorthand reference for the component. It will also appear in the component report. Thedefault entry will be an abbreviation of the component type and the component number. Forexample, the second jacket shell for the vessel will start with amark SJ2.

Page 47: Design Calc s Manual

Nozzle

Nozzle ID Number:This field is for user reference when inside the nozzle form; it will not appearanywhere else. The default value is the component number (e.g., if this is the fourth nozzle, the valuewill be four).

Host:Select the host type for the nozzle.

Detail Requirements: Because the wording in the code allowsmultiple interpretations, this allowsthe user to choose whether the weld detail requirements per UW-16 should bemet in the corrodedcondition, the new condition, or both.

Nozzle Configuration:Select the basic nozzle attachment configuration from the drop-downmenu.

Nozzle Location

The following fields only affect the 3D drawing; they do not have an effect on the calculations orthe output.

Distance from Reference Line:For nozzles in cylindrical shells, this indicates the distance from thereference line datummeasured along the axis of the vessel. For nozzles in nozzles, this is theaxial distance of the second nozzle from the first nozzle's intersection with its host. For example, ifa cylindrical nozzle is attached to a cylindrical shell and a second nozzle is attached to thecylindrical nozzle, the distance from reference line will be the distance from the axis of the secondnozzle to the location where the cylindrical nozzle intersects the shell.

Distance from Center of Head/Flange:This indicates the distance from the center of the head orflange to where the nozzle axis pierces the inside surface; the distance is measured parallel to theaxis of the head or flange and does not indicate direction.

Nozzle Orientation:Determines the position of the nozzle around the component. Vertical vesselsin the standard viewwill show a nozzle at 0° on the front of the vessel, 90° on the right side of thevessel, and so on. Horizontal vessels in the standard viewwill show a nozzle at 0° on the top of thevessel, 90° on the back of the vessel, and so on. The angle is determined based on where thenozzle axis penetrates the inside surface of the host.

Longitudinal Angle of Orientation:For nozzles in shells, this describes the angle between the nozzleaxis and the axis of the shell. A 90° angle indicates that the nozzle is not tilted; an angle less than 90°tilts toward the left end or top of the shell while an angle greater than 90° indicates a tilt toward theright end or bottom of the shell. When the nozzle is tangential, this field will be locked to 90°.

35 | Page

Page 48: Design Calc s Manual

Nozzle

For nozzles attached to flat heads and blind flanges, this describes the angle the nozzlemakeswiththe head axis; 0° is parallel to the head axis. If the nozzle is tangential, this value will be locked tozero.

Meridian Angle of Orientation:For nozzles in flat heads, dished heads, and blind flanges, themeridian angle rotates the nozzle axis around a line that goes from the center of the head to the edgeof the head and passes through the nozzle axis. With a view starting at the center of the head andlooking toward the direction of nozzle orientation, 0 ° is radial, a negative angle rotates the nozzle tothe right, and a positive angle rotates the nozzle to the left.

For nozzles in elliptical heads, this value will be locked to zero if the nozzle is a tangentialconfiguration.

Latitudinal Angle of Orientation: For nozzles in dished heads, this rotates the nozzle axis around aline that is concentric with the head and passes through the nozzle axis; 0° is radial, a positive anglerotates the nozzle towards the edge of the head, and a negative angle rotates the nozzle towards thecenter of the head.

For nozzles in elliptical heads, this value will be locked to zero unless the nozzle is a tangentialconfiguration.

Circumferential Angle of Orientation: Represents the angle of rotation created between thetangential nozzle axis and a radial equivalent nozzle axis. A positive value will tilt the nozzle to theright for a vertical vessel in standard view and to the back for a horizontal vessel in standard view.This field is tied to "Dimension L" on the Design Info tab (See page 39).

Show with Repad: Select this box to add a repad to the nozzle.

Groove Location:Determines the groove well depth label on the report.

36 | Page

Page 49: Design Calc s Manual

Nozzle

Design Info

Pressures

Override:When this box is checked, the Pressure field can be changed to a pressure other than thatof the host. If the box is cleared, the Pressure field is locked to the host pressure.

Pressure:The internal design pressure (pressure on the concave side). This value is gaugepressure. When “Solve for Thickness” is selected, this value is an input and should not include statichead.When “Solve for Pressure” is selected, this value is a result. In the latter case, it represents thetotal internal pressure (design pressure plus head) that the component can handle andmeet code inthe absence of any other loadings.

Static Head:The internal pressure (pressure on the concave side) resulting from the static head ofthe fluid. The user must determine this value and input it accordingly. It will be added to the Pressureinput and the sumwill be used in the internal pressure calculations for the component. This field willnot be present when “Solve for Thickness” is selected.

Opening Information

Nozzle Path: If the opening is in a Category A joint, select Cat. A. If the nozzle is in ERW orautogenously welded pipe and it is not clear where the welds are or it is clear that the opening is inone of the joints, select ERW/Auto. For all other cases, select None. This setting affects the value ofE1 used to determine the value ofA1 in the reinforcement calculations; see the definition of E1 inUG-37 for more information.

Access Opening: If the nozzle is to be used only for access or inspection purposes, select an option(other than "None") from the drop-downmenu. This will give relief from the UG-45(b) nozzle neckthickness calculations. Selecting "Elliptical Manway" will not change the calculations to reflect anelliptical neck.

37 | Page

Page 50: Design Calc s Manual

Nozzle

Nozzle or reinf. Outside spherical portion:For nozzles in torispherical or ASME F & D heads, selectthe boxwhen any of the reinforcement of the nozzle neck crosses into the knuckle region. If thenozzle and its reinforcement (including any reinforcement from the head) are completely within thedish of the head, the boxmay be left clear. This will affect the value of tr used to determine the valuesofA andA1 in the reinforcement calculations. See the definition of tr in UG-37 for more information.

Nozzle or reinf. Outside 80% of Center:For nozzles in elliptical heads, select the boxwhen any of thereinforcement of the nozzle neck crosses outside the 80% region, which is defined as a circlecentered on the head axis that includes 80% of the head skirt inside diameter. If the nozzle and itsreinforcement (including any reinforcement from the head) are completely within the 80% region, theboxmay be left clear. This will affect the value of tr used to determine the values ofA andA1 in thereinforcement calculations. See the definition of tr in UG-37 for more information.

Nozzle Material

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

38 | Page

Page 51: Design Calc s Manual

Nozzle

Stress (Hot):Thematerial allowable stress at the temperature listed for the internal pressurecondition. When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSectionII, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 forBolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength fromTable U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowablestress tables for yield and creep governed cases. In caseswhere the temperature listed for theinternal pressure condition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s stress line, thevalue will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the software that the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and the connection to thematerial in thedatabase will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Stress (Cold):Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specifiedin the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value iscalculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value islimited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Factor B table: The external pressure table assigned to thematerial in the allowable stress tables inSection II, Part D. The table is used to determine the external pressure strength of the componentand also the longitudinal compressive strength. Selecting a Factor B table other than the oneassigned to thematerial will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Nozzle Dimensions

Inside Diameter:The component inside diameter in the new condition.

Efficiency:The joint efficiency of the component, which is determined from Table UW-12 for weldedjoints andmay also represent ligament efficiency per UG-53.When both ligaments and welded jointsexist, the lowest efficiency is used. See Appendix L for further help in determining the efficiency. Thisefficiency is for the long seam in the nozzle neck and does not represent the joint efficiency for thejoint attaching the nozzle to its host or for any joints in the host that the nozzle penetrates.

39 | Page

Page 52: Design Calc s Manual

Nozzle

Thickness:This value is in the new condition. For the component to pass, this valuemust be at leastthe sum of the thickness necessary for pressure and temperature, corrosion allowances, andforming allowances or under-tolerances. If the thickness necessary for pressure and temperature isless than the thickness required byUG-16, the nominal thicknessmust be at least the sum of theUG-16 thickness and the tolerances, etc. In some cases, under-tolerance is not considered (e.g., fornozzle reinforcement, the under-tolerance of the nozzle neck is ignored). When “Solve forThickness” is selected, the software will determine the smallest standard size that passes. The useris able tomanually edit this value.

Groove Depth:This field represents the depth of the groove weld in the nozzle neck for abuttingnozzle details and for details inserting the nozzle neck. The default is full penetration value. This fieldwill only be available for details that include groove welds.

Penetration:Only available for the UW-16(k) or Partial Penetration nozzle configurations, this fieldrepresents the partial depth that the nozzle neck is inserted into the host wall.

Inside CA:Corrosion allowance on the inside of the component (concave side).

Dimension L:The radial offset of the nozzle, defined as the axis to axis distance between the nozzleand a hypothetical nozzle that is radial. This field is only available for tangential nozzles and is used inthe calculation of the developed opening for nozzles in cylindrical shells, hemispherical heads, andelliptical heads. In dished heads, this is the same as the distance from the center of the head whenthe nozzle axis is parallel to the head axis.

External CA:Corrosion allowance on the outside of the component (convex side). This field isavailable for internal heads and for the inner components of a jacketed vessel.

Developed Opening: The chord length (in the new condition) of the opening as defined in Figure UG-40 for the nozzle type being used. Chord length ismost commonly determined from the ID of thenozzle neck, however certain details, such asUW-16(k), are based on the holemade in the host toaccommodate the nozzle. The corroded version of this value is used as d in the various nozzlecalculations, including the reinforcement exemption criteria in UG-36(c)(3)(a).

40 | Page

Page 53: Design Calc s Manual

Nozzle

Custom Developed Opening: Select this box tomanually enter values for all nozzle angles (See page34). Doing so will also requiremanual completion of the "DevelopedOpening" and "CorrodedDevelopedOpening" fields.

tb1 and tb2 CA:Determines the corrosion allowance used in the UG-45 calculations to determinetb1 and tb2; this field defaults to Nozzle CA for new vessels and patched vessels.If Nozzle CA isselected, the nozzle corrosion allowance will be used. If Host CA is selected, the calculationswill usethe corrosion allowance of the host.

UG-45 Comparison:Select the number of digits from the nozzle thickness to compare to the UG-45thickness requirement. The default value is four decimal places for customary units and two decimalplaces for metric units. The number of decimal places used is examined after any pipe toleranceshave been considered.

Flange/MDMT

Other Calculations

Perform UCS-66 calculations: Selecting this check boxwill cause the software to performUCS-66toughness calculations on the component. This option is only available tomaterials that are classifiedasUCSmaterials per Table UCS-23.

Exemption Drop-down:WhenUCS-66 calculationswill not be performed (the software will not allowthese calculationswhen a non-UCSmaterial is used), an exemptionmust be entered. Theexemptionmay be typed in or selected from the drop-down options, but the user is responsible forensuring that the exemption selected is valid for thematerial, service, etc., in question.

MDMT Reductions

Take UCS-66(b) Reduction:Selecting this check boxwill take advantage of the reduction in allowedMDMT per UCS-66(b). This paragraph includes a calculation for the component whichcompensates for any excessmaterial thickness in the component.

Apply UCS-68(c):Selecting this check boxwill give an additional flat reduction in the allowedMDMTper UCS-68(c). Carefully review this paragraph as there are steep requirements for this exemption.

41 | Page

Page 54: Design Calc s Manual

Nozzle

MDMT

MDMT Curve:The notes in Figure UCS-66 provide the criteria to assign theMDMT curve to thematerial and product form of the component. Curve A will give the least favorable allowedMDMTandCurve D will give themost favorable allowedMDMT.WhenUCSmaterials do not have a clearmatch using the criteria, they are assigned a conservative value of A. As the software cannotcurrently obtain possible improvements in curve rating due to heat treatment and other factors, theuser may override the curve value.

MDMT Pressure:The net internal pressure (concave side) on the component coincident with theminimumdesignmetal temperature (MDMT). This includes static head.

Flange 1-7(b) Info

The following fields are only available when the Appendix 1-7(b) calculations are required.

Flange OD:The outside diameter of the nozzle flange.

Flange Thickness:The thickness of the nozzle flange, not including the thickness of any raisedface.

Flange Bolt Hole Diameter:The diameter of a single bolt hole in the nozzle flange (e.g., 1/2" or12mm). This is not the bolt circle diameter (e.g., 24" or 610mm).

Shell to flange offset distance:The distance from the outside of the shell wall to the side of theflange nearest the shell. This is measured in the plane that has the shell axis running left/right andthe nozzle axis running up/down (assuming the nozzle flange is at the top of the cross-section).

Flange Hot Stress:Thematerial allowable stress at the temperature listed for the internalpressure condition. This value is not determined by the software. Use the following description asguidance in determining the input that should be used. When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specified inthe vessel screen, this value comes from Section II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this valueis calculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, thevalue is limited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governedcases.

Flange Cold Stress:Thematerial allowable stress at the 70 °F (20 °C).This value is notdetermined by the software. Use the following description as guidance in determining the inputthat should be used. When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specified in the vessel screen, this value comesfrom Section II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, andTable 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value is calculated based on the ultimatestrength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed inthe allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.

42 | Page

Page 55: Design Calc s Manual

Nozzle

Area Info

Nozzle

External Projection:The distance that the nozzle axis projects past the outside surface of the vesselwall.

Weld 41: The weld leg of the nozzle neck perimeter weld on the outside of the vessel.

Internal Projection:The distance that the nozzle axis projects past the inside surface of the vesselwall.

Weld 43: The weld leg of the nozzle neck perimeter weld on the inside of the vessel. In the case ofPartial Penetration or UW-16(k) nozzle configuration,Weld 43 refers to the inner fillet weld betweenthe nozzle neck and the host thickness.

Factor F: This value represents a correction for the stress direction in cones and cylinders and is onlyavailable for input when the nozzle is in a cone or a cylinder and the nozzle is integrally reinforced(i.e., the nozzle is attached by full penetration groove welds and a repad is not used). Review thedefinition for F in UsG-37 and Figure UG-37 before editing this value; a value of 1.0 is conservative.

Use Repad: Select this box to add a repad to the nozzle.

Reinforcing Pad

The following fields are only available if a repad is used.

43 | Page

Page 56: Design Calc s Manual

Nozzle

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog isused, the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaults. For example, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this field will show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field willshow SA-516. The field may be edited by the user to say anything without breaking therelationship to thematerial database; while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must takecare to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user withoutbreaking the relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must takecare to enter correct information.

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerialsthat did not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated bythe "UnlistedMaterial" caption.

Stress (Hot):Thematerial allowable stress at the temperature listed for the internal pressurecondition. When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, andTable 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value is calculated based on the ultimatestrength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed inthe allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases. In caseswhere the temperaturelisted for the internal pressure condition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’sstress line, the value will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the software that the user isdefining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and the connection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Stress (Cold):Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor isspecified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor isspecified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, PartD; furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield andcreep governed cases. Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in thedatabase as indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

44 | Page

Page 57: Design Calc s Manual

Nozzle

Apply Split Repad Penalty:Select the box to apply a multiplier of 0.75 to the value ofA5 used inthe nozzle reinforcement and weld strength calculations. This 25% penalty is applied per theconditions listed in UG-37(h) and was introduced in the 2009 addenda to the 2007 edition ofSection VIII, Division 1.

Diameter: The outside diameter of the reinforcing pad. If the pad is not circular in shape, enter thediameter of the reinforcing pad for the cross-section in question as though the repad werecircular. For example, when looking at the tangential cross-section of an off-set nozzle, thediameter of the pad would be entered as the distance from one edge of the pad on one side of thenozzle to the opposite edge of the pad on the other side of the nozzle measured along the chordlength of the opening.

te:The thickness of the reinforcing pad.

Groove Depth:The depth of the groove weld deposited in the repad at the perimeter of the nozzleneck. The default value is full penetration.

Weld 42: The weld leg of the repad perimeter weld.

Custom Limit of Reinforcement: When the Enable box is selected, the value entered will be used tolimit the parallel limit of reinforcement determined per UG-40(b). Using this field may result inreducing the available area of reinforcement values andmakemeeting the UG-37 or Appendix 1-7(a) reinforcement requirementsmore difficult. For example, nozzles in close proximitymay not haveoverlapping limits of reinforcement, so the code would require a reduction in this value and wouldthereby increase the difficulty of meeting UG-37 requirements. See UG-42 (UG-39 for nozzles in flatheads) for more information. In addition, nozzles typically exempt from reinforcement calculationswill lose their exemption if this field is used.

Total Nozzle Weight:Theweight of the nozzle can be specified by the user or calculated by thesoftware. This value will be dynamically calculated by the software unless the user manually enters avalue.Once input has beenmanually entered, the value becomes static and is no longer calculated.

Calc Reinf. For nozzles meeting UG-36(c)(3)(a):Select this box to force nozzle reinforcementcalculations. Calculationswill be performed even for cases that are exempt as small openings perUG-36(c)(3)(a).

45 | Page

Page 58: Design Calc s Manual

Nozzle

Determining if UG-16 Applies to a Nozzle

Theminimum thickness selection (Vessel Information > General Tab) can be applied to nozzlecalculations. Paragraph UG-45 covers the thickness of nozzle necks. If UG-45(b) applies to thenozzle, theminimum thickness per UG-16 does affect the nozzle neck thickness. View the definitionsof tb1 and tb2 from paragraph UG-45 in SC VIII-I for more information.

Nozzle Troubleshooting

Nozzle design includes checking several different calculations and failuremodes.Weld detailrequirements, weld strength, nozzle neck thickness, reinforcement, compact reinforcement, andlarge opening rigiditymust all be analyzed. This article will address varying issues that may come upwhile designing a nozzle and will suggest solutionswhen applicable.

The value of E is incorrect in the nozzle thickness calculations

This value is equal to that entered in the "Efficiency" field on the Design Info tab and it drives thenozzle neck thickness calculations in UG-45(a). If you are looking at the calculation for trn, rememberthat UG-37(a) defines trn as for a seamless nozzle neck.

The value of E1 is incorrect in the nozzle thickness calculations

This value is set based on the "Nozzle Path" selection on the Design Info tab. If the nozzle host isERW/Auto pipe, youmust select that to make the calculation set E1=0.85. View theNozzle >Design Info help file for more information.

The Area of Reinforcement from the nozzle host is zero

The A1 value is being forced to zero by a setting in the vessel screen. If the “Use excess vessel wallthickness for nozzle reinforcement calculations” box is not selected, material from the host will not beused for reinforcement, resulting in A1=0. This box should be selected unless your internalrequirements or those of a customer indicate that A1 should not be considered. To change thissetting, select Vessel Information from the Vessel menu on the Components panel and go to theDesign tab.

46 | Page

Page 59: Design Calc s Manual

Nozzle

Nozzle Planes of Reinforcement Methodology

DesignCalcs determines tr as defined in UG-37(a) per circumferential stress (longitudinal plane).For a situation in which a hillside nozzle is designed where the developed opening is bigger whenlooking at the longitudinal plane and the code is allowing a value for F that is less than 1.0, design thenozzle as two separate nozzles to reap themost benefit from code allowances. It is also possible tocheck for the largest developed opening and keep F equal to 1.0 at the same time.

As defined in UG-37(a), F is the correction in the code for the fact that longitudinal stress(circumferential plane) is½ of the circumferential stress (longitudinal plane). When in the longitudinalplane, the valuemust be 1.0. In other planes, the valuemay fall between 0.5 and 1.0 (dependentupon the plane) if the designmeets certain requirements: the nozzle is attached to the vessel with fullpenetration groove welds and the nozzle is integrally reinforced (i.e., no repad).

47 | Page

Page 60: Design Calc s Manual

48 | Page

STUDDED OUTLET (return to Contents)

General Info 48

Outlet 49

Flange 51

Bolting 52

MDMT 53

General Info

Description:The label given for the component. It will appear in the component pane, the reportdialog, the summary pane, and at the top of the component report. This will default to the componenttype and component number. For example, the third nozzle for the vessel will start with a descriptionof Nozzle 3.

Purpose:Select a type from the drop-down list or manually enter one into the field. This field is for theuser’s reference.

Mark: A shorthand reference for the component. It will also appear in the component report. Thedefault entry will be an abbreviation of the component type and the component number. Forexample, the second jacket shell for the vessel will start with amark SJ2.

No:This field is for user reference when inside the studded outlet form; it will not appear anywhereelse. The default value is the component number (e.g., if this is the fourth studded outlet, the valuewill be four).

Detail Requirements: Because the wording in the code allowsmultiple interpretations, this allowsthe user to choose whether the weld detail requirements per UW-16 should bemet in the corrodedcondition, the new condition, or both.

Page 61: Design Calc s Manual

StuddedOutlet

The following fields only affect the 3D drawing; they do not have an effect on the calculations orthe output.

Distance from Reference Line:For studded outlets in cylindrical shells, this indicates the distancefrom the reference line datummeasured along the axis of the vessel.

Orientation:Determines the position of the studded outlet around the component. Vertical vesselsin the standard view will show a studded outlet at 0° on the front of the vessel, 90° on the rightside of the vessel, and so on. Horizontal vessels in the standard view will show a studded outlet at0° on the top of the vessel, 90° on the back of the vessel, and so on. The angle is determinedbased on where the studded outlet axis penetrates the inside surface of the host.

Rotate bolt pattern:This field can be used to toggle between a two-hole and a one-hole boltpattern in the 3D render.

Nozzle Path: If the opening is in a Category A joint, select Cat. A. If the nozzle is in ERW orautogenously welded pipe and it is not clear where the welds are or it is clear that the opening is inone of the joints, select ERW/Auto. For all other cases, select None. This setting affects the value ofE1 used to determine the value ofA1 in the reinforcement calculations; see the definition of E1 inUG-37 for more information.

Outlet

Studded Outlet Material

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

49 | Page

Page 62: Design Calc s Manual

StuddedOutlet

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Allowable Stress:Thematerial allowable stress at the temperature listed for the internal pressurecondition. When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSectionII, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 forBolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength fromTable U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowablestress tables for yield and creep governed cases. In caseswhere the temperature listed for theinternal pressure condition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s stress line, thevalue will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the software that the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and the connection to thematerial in thedatabase will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Vacuum Allowable Stress:Thematerial allowable stress at the host temperature listed for theexternal pressure condition. When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specified in the vessel screen, this valuecomes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials,and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value is calculated based on theultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value is limited to the valueslisted in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases. In caseswhere the hosttemperature listed for the external pressure condition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s stress line, the value will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the software that theuser is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and the connection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Design Pressure:The internal design pressure (pressure on the concave side). This value is gaugepressure. When “Solve for Thickness” is selected, this value is an input and should not include statichead.When “Solve for Pressure” is selected, this value is a result. In the latter case, it represents thetotal internal pressure (design pressure plus head) that the component can handle andmeet code inthe absence of any other loadings.

50 | Page

Page 63: Design Calc s Manual

StuddedOutlet

Static Head:The internal pressure (pressure on the concave side) resulting from the static head ofthe fluid. The user must determine this value and input it accordingly. It will be added to the Pressureinput and the sumwill be used in the internal pressure calculations for the component. This field willnot be present when “Solve for Thickness” is selected.

Design Temperature:Themaximummeanmetal design temperature for the internal pressure caseas defined in UG-20(a).

Internal Corrosion Allowance:Corrosion allowance on the inside surfaces of the component.

External Corrosion Allowance:Corrosion allowance on the outside surfaces of the component.

Inside Diameter:The bore of the studded outlet.

Outside Diameter:The outside diameter of the studded outlet.

Finished Opening Diameter:The opening diameter in the host wall in the new condition. It isassumed to be circular in shape.

Thickness:The studded outlet thickness at the thinnest cross-section in the new condition.

Flange

Flange Dimensions

Weld 42: The weld leg of the studded outlet perimeter weld.

Weld 44: The weld leg of the studded outlet weld at the finished opening of the host shell.

51 | Page

Page 64: Design Calc s Manual

StuddedOutlet

Diameter of Reinforcement: The limit of reinforcement measured parallel to the studded outlet axis.This is a calculated value determined per UG-40(b). The result may be reduced by the user, but itmay not be increased beyond what is calculated per UG-40(b). Reducing the value results in a loweravailable area in the reinforcement calculations andmakesmeeting UG-37 reinforcementrequirementsmore difficult. For example, openings in close proximitymay not have overlappinglimits of reinforcement, so the code would require a reduction in this value and would therebyincrease the difficulty of meeting UG-37 requirements. See UG-42 for more information.

Bolting

Load and Bolt Calculations

Number of Bolts:The actual number of bolts, not the number of bolt holes.

Nominal Diameter:The nominal diameter of the bolt. This field will be completed automatically if theBolt Search is used to select the bolts.

Bolt Hole Diameter:The bolt hole diameter, not the bolt circle diameter. This field will fill inautomatically if the Bolt Search is used to select the bolts; the value will be determined based on thebolt nominal diameter.

Bolt Size / Threads Per Inch: These fields are completed automatically when a bolt size is selectedfrom the Bolt Search.

Depth of Hole:The depth of the bolt holemeasured from the outside surface to the bottom of the bolthole. This value is assumed to not be greater than the pad thickness. See the image on theGeneralInfo tab for more information.

Bolt Circle:The diameter of the circle that passes through the center of each bolt.

52 | Page

Page 65: Design Calc s Manual

StuddedOutlet

MDMT

Other Calculations

Perform UCS-66 calculations: Selecting this check boxwill cause the software to performUCS-66toughness calculations on the component. This option is only available tomaterials that are classifiedasUCSmaterials per Table UCS-23.

Exemption Drop-down:WhenUCS-66 calculationswill not be performed (the software will not allowthese calculationswhen a non-UCSmaterial is used), an exemptionmust be entered. Theexemptionmay be typed in or selected from the drop-down options, but the user is responsible forensuring that the exemption selected is valid for thematerial, service, etc., in question.

MDMT Reductions

Apply UCS-68(c):Selecting this check boxwill give an additional flat reduction in the allowedMDMTper UCS-68(c). Carefully review this paragraph as there are steep requirements for this exemption.

MDMT

MDMT Pressure:The net internal pressure (concave side) on the component coincident with theminimumdesignmetal temperature (MDMT). This includes static head.

MDMT Curve:The notes in Figure UCS-66 provide the criteria to assign theMDMT curve to thematerial and product form of the component. Curve A will give the least favorable allowedMDMTandCurve D will give themost favorable allowedMDMT.WhenUCSmaterials do not have a clearmatch using the criteria, they are assigned a conservative value of A. As the software cannotcurrently obtain possible improvements in curve rating due to heat treatment and other factors, theuser may override the curve value.

Dry Weight/Flooded Weight:Currently these values are not calculated in the software. Any input inthese fields will be added to the summary page information. These valueswill also need to be addedas attachment weight to be considered in the structural calculations.

53 | Page

Page 66: Design Calc s Manual

StuddedOutlet

Surface Area/Volume:Currently these values are not calculated in the software. Any input in thesefields will be added to the summary page information.

54 | Page

Page 67: Design Calc s Manual

55 | Page

RATED FLANGE

(ASME OFF THE SHELF

FLANGES ) (return to Contents)

Rated Flange 55

Rated Flange Default Creation Settings Tips 57

Rated Flange Information 58

Rated Flange Methodology 60

Rated Flange

Description:The label given for the component. It will appear in the component pane, the reportdialog, the summary pane, and at the top of the component report. This will default to the componenttype and component number. For example, the third nozzle for the vessel will start with a descriptionof Nozzle 3.

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Temperature:Themaximummeanmetal design temperature for the internal pressure case asdefined in UG-20(a).

Page 68: Design Calc s Manual

Rated Flange (ASME Off the Shelf Flanges)

Pressure:The internal design pressure (pressure on the concave side). This value is gaugepressure. When “Solve for Thickness” is selected, this value is an input and should not include statichead.When “Solve for Pressure” is selected, this value is a result. In the latter case, it represents thetotal internal pressure (design pressure plus head) that the component can handle andmeet code inthe absence of any other loadings.

Static Head:The internal pressure (pressure on the concave side) resulting from the static head ofthe fluid. The user must determine this value and input it accordingly. It will be added to the Pressureinput and the sumwill be used in the internal pressure calculations for the component. This field willnot be present when “Solve for Thickness” is selected.

Reference Notes:These notes are provided for information only and are not currently used to restrictthe design. The reference is drawn from the selected Section VIII, Division 1 edition/addenda basedon the rated flange size. Table U-3 dictates the referenced standard and year.

Type:Select a flange type from those in the B16.5 and B16.47 standards.Weld Neck Series A and Baswell as Blind Series A and B are the large size flanges fromB16.47.

Material Group:The B16.5 and B16.47 standards organizematerials into material groups in order toassign pressure temperature ratings. All materials in the samematerial group will have the samepressure temperature ratings. Thematerial group is selected automatically when amaterial ischosen and the value cannot be edited.

Size:Select a flange size. B16.5 covers flange sizes up to 24 inches; B16.47 covers flanges up to 60inches.

ASME Class:The ASME rating class from the B16.5 and B16.47 standards.

Orientation:This field is only present when the when the software needs to determine where to placethe rated flange on its host. When the host is a shell, select whether the face of the flange pointstoward or away from the reference line. When the host is a reducer, select whether to place theflange on the large or small end.

Rotate bolt pattern:This field can be used to toggle between a two-hole and a one-hole bolt patternin the 3D render.

56 | Page

Page 69: Design Calc s Manual

Rated Flange (ASME Off the Shelf Flanges)

Rated Flange Default Creation Settings Tips

Material Data

Thematerial data available to other components is now included in the Rated Flange window.

l A new material default has been added for rated flange for bothMetric and Customary units. Just asthe other material defaults, this is located on theMaterials tab under Tools > Defaults. It works thesameway as thematerials default for the other components. This default replaces both thematerialgroup default and the original material default for rated flange.

l SA-105 is the default when the software is shipped.

l Thematerials default for rated flange only allows selection of materials that are included in one of thefollowing ASME references: B16.5 2003 edition, B16.5 2009 edition, B16.47 1996, B16.47 2006, andB16.47 2011.

l Thematerial search in the rated flange form only allows selection of materials that are included in thecurrent active reference: B16.5 2003 edition, B16.5 2009 edition, B16.47 1996, B16.47 2006, or B16.472011.

l Due to thematerial changes, designs patched from 2012.0 or an earlier version of DesignCalcs will nothave amaterial set; in most cases themath can still run as theMaterial Group will still be set.

Default Settings

57 | Page

Page 70: Design Calc s Manual

Rated Flange (ASME Off the Shelf Flanges)

l If the size is 24” or less and the host is a shell, head, reducer, or nozzle, the default type will be set tothe selection in the ASME Flange Type field on the General tab under Tools > Defaults.

l If the size is 24” or less and the host is a flange, the default type will be set to Blind.

l If the size is greater than 24” and the host is a shell, head, reducer, or nozzle, the default type will beset toWeld Neck Series A or B based on the selection in the ASME Flange Series field on the Generaltab under Tools > Defaults.

l If the size is greater than 24” and the host is a flange, the default type will be set to Blind Series A or Bbased on the selection in the ASME Flange Series field on the General tab under Tools > Defaults.

Flange Size

l If the size of the host is less than or equal to ½”, the size will be½”.

l If the size of the host is over 58”, the size will be 60”.

l If the size of the host falls on a rated flange size included in the B16 references, the flange will defaultto that size.

l If the size of the host falls between sizes included in the B16 references,the flange will default to thelarger of the two sizes.

Flange Class

Upon creation of a rated flange, DesignCalcs will attempt to find the optimal flange class. If anoptimal rated flange cannot be determined, the flange will start at class 150.

Rated Flange Information

Reference Notes

These notes are not currently used to restrict the design; they are provided for your information. Thereference is drawn from the selected Section VIII, Division 1 edition/addenda based on the ratedflange size. Table U-3 dictates the referenced standard and year.

l Reference is B16.5 2003 - Size ≤ 24"; 2010 editionl Reference is B16.5 2009 - Size ≤ 24"; 2011 addenda or 2013 editionl Reference is B16.47 1996 - Size > 24"; 2010 editionl Reference is B16.47 2006 - Size > 24"; 2011 addendal Reference is B16.47 2011 - Size > 24"; 2013 edition

58 | Page

Page 71: Design Calc s Manual

Rated Flange (ASME Off the Shelf Flanges)

Flange Type

The selected flange type limits other aspects of the design. The software does not limit the choices inthe size and class fields based on that selected in the flange field, though, so if a combination isselected that does not have a reference, the design will be given a status of failed.

Slip On

l NPS 1/2" to 3-1/2" for Class 400 are dual rated for Class 600l NPS 1/2" to 2-1/2" for Class 900 are dual rated for Class 1500l Limited to NPS 2-1/2” for Class 1500l Do not have data for Class 2500

Socket Welding

l Limited to the NPS range of ½” to 3” for Class 150, 300l Do not have data for Class 400 flangesl Limited to the NPS range of ½” to 3” for Class 600l Do not have data for Class 900 flangesl Limited to the NPS range of ½” to 2-1/2” for Class 1500l Do not have data for Class 2500

Threaded

l NPS 1/2" to 3-1/2" for Class 400 are dual rated for Class 600l NPS 1/2" to 2-1/2" for Class 900 are dual rated for Class 1500l Limited to NPS 2-1/2” for Class 1500 and 2500

Lapped

l NPS 1/2" to 3-1/2" for Class 400 are dual rated for Class 600l NPS 1/2" to 2-1/2" for Class 900 are dual rated for Class 1500

Blind/Weld Neck

l NPS 1/2" to 3-1/2" for Class 400 are dual rated for Class 600l NPS 1/2" to 2-1/2" for Class 900 are dual rated for Class 1500l Series A

l Limited to Classes 150 to 900l Limited to 26” to 60” for classes 150, 300, 400, and 600l Limited to 26” to 48” for class 900

59 | Page

Page 72: Design Calc s Manual

Rated Flange (ASME Off the Shelf Flanges)

l Series Bl Limited to Classes 75 to 900l Limited to 26” to 60” for classes 150 and 300l Limited to 26” to 36” for classes 400, 600, and 900

Material Group

Material Group assignment is not dependent on units of measure; it has been normalized acrossB16.5 2003 and 2009 and B16.47 1996, 2006, and 2011. Material Group and ASME Class aretaken together to determine the pressure/temperature ratings. Thematerial group is assignedautomatically and cannot be changed.

l B16.47 1996 only uses customary units.l B16.5 2003 and 2009 and B16.47 2006 have both customary andmetric units.l B16.5 includes material groups for 3.X, but B16.47 does not.

ASME Class

ASME Class is taken together with Material Group to determine the pressure/temperature ratings.The classes covered by the software have differences in coverage.

l B16.5 includes flange classes 1500 and 2500 (B16.47 does not).l B16.47 includes flange class 75 (B16.5 does not).l Both B16.5 and B16.47 include flange classes 150, 300, 400, 600, and 900.l Class 75 is only for Series B Blind andWeldneck rated flanges.l Class 75 is only for NPS 24" to NPS 60".l Class 900 and up do not have data for NPS 3 -1/2”.l Class 400 has data starting at NPS 4”. Smaller NPS Class 400 flanges are dual rated with Class 600.l Class 900 has data starting at NPS 3”. Smaller NPS Class 900 flanges are dual rated with Class 1500.l Class 1500 has data up NPS 24”.l Class 2500 has data up to NPS 12”.

Rated Flange Methodology

DesignCalcs supports ASMEOff the Shelf flanges. In the software, these are referred to as ratedflanges. This article will surface flange details and explore themethodology behind how the softwarehandles the calculations for these flanges.

60 | Page

Page 73: Design Calc s Manual

Rated Flange (ASME Off the Shelf Flanges)

TheRated Flange designer uses the default settings to automatically create a passing flange when itis opened. The size is first determined and then the smallest passing class is selected.

Determine Reference

The reference is determined from the Section VIII, Division 1 selection (2010 edition or 2011addenda) and the rated flange size. Table U-3 in Section VIII, Division 1, dictates the referencedstandard and the year to use.

a. Reference is B16.5 2003 if the size ≤ 24” and the Section VIII, Division 1 selection is 2010 edition.b. Reference is B16.5 2009 if the size ≤ 24” and the Section VIII, Division 1 selection is 2011 addenda or

2013 edition.c. Reference is B16.47 1996 if the size > 24” and the Section VIII, Division 1 selection is 2010 edition.d. Reference is B16.47 2006 if the size > 24” and the Section VIII, Division 1 selection is 2011 addenda.e. Reference is B16.47 2011 if the size > 24" and the Section VIII, Division 1 selection is 2013 edition.

Assign Material Group

Thematerial group is assigned based on thematerial selected and the reference.

Place Reference Notes

Based on thematerial selected, notes are provided in the Rated Flange window for your reference.These are currently not used to restrict the design; we strongly advise that you review them.

Determine M.A.P.

TheMaximumAllowable Pressure (MAP) is determined from the units of measure, reference,material group, rated flange class, and the temperature. The output is in PSI for Customary unitsandMPa for Metric units.

a. Metric data is not included in the B16.47 1996 reference. If a metric design is used with this reference,the temperature will be converted from Celsius to Fahrenheit for the determination. The result will thenbe converted from PSI toMPa.

b. If the temperature is above 1500°F (816°C), theM.A.P. cannot be determined as thepressure/temperature ratings only go up to 1500°F (816°C).

c. If the temperature is below 100°F (38°C), 100°F (38°C)will be used in the determination as this is thelowest temperature in the pressure/temperature ratings.

61 | Page

Page 74: Design Calc s Manual

Rated Flange (ASME Off the Shelf Flanges)

d. Linear interpolation is used between data points.e. It is possible that the combination of the reference, material group, and rated flange class will not have

corresponding pressure/temperature ratings. If this is the case, theM.A.P. cannot be determined.

Determine Total Pressure

The total pressure is determined as the sum of the Design Pressure and the Static Head.

Compare Total Pressure and M.A.P.

Total Pressuremust be less than or equal to theMaximumAllowable Pressure in order for the ratedflange design to pass. If the Total Pressure is greater than theM.A.P., the Total Pressure label at thebottom of the window will be displayed in red.

Reference Check

The size, class, and type are checked tomake sure that the combination is included in thereferences. If the combination is not included, the Rated Flange will be placed in a failed status. Inthat case, the labels for these fields will be displayed in red. There are several combinations that aredual rated for two classes; these will be given a passw/comment status assuming theM.A.P. checkpasses.

62 | Page

Page 75: Design Calc s Manual

63 | Page

APPENDIX 2 FLANGE (return to Contents)

General Info 63

Pressure 64

Host/Flange 66

Gasket 71

Load/Bolt Calcs 73

Determining the Value of the Lever Arm on a Spherically Dished Cover 76

Reducing Number of Bolts Results in Flange Thickness Reduction 76

General Info

Description:The label given for the component. It will appear in the component pane, the reportdialog, the summary pane, and at the top of the component report. This will default to the componenttype and component number. For example, the third nozzle for the vessel will start with a descriptionof Nozzle 3.

Mark: A shorthand reference for the component. It will also appear in the component report. Thedefault entry will be an abbreviation of the component type and the component number. Forexample, the second jacket shell for the vessel will start with amark SJ2.

Design Type:Select the basic flange configuration from the options.

Orientation:This field is only present when the when the software needs to determine where to placethe rated flange on its host. When the host is a shell, select whether the face of the flange pointstoward or away from the reference line. When the host is a reducer, select whether to place theflange on the large or small end.

Page 76: Design Calc s Manual

Appendix 2 Flange

Rotate bolt pattern:This field can be used to toggle between a two-hole and a one-hole bolt patternin the 3D render.

Consider Flange Rigidity: Select the box to perform the flange rigidity code check per Appendix 2-14. Though this code check is now required per Section VIII, Division 1, it was optional in the pastand this field allows the user to decide whether or not to consider the requirement.

Pressure

Internal Pressure

Temperature:Themaximummeanmetal design temperature for the internal pressure case asdefined in UG-20(a).

Corrosion Allowance:Corrosion allowance on the inside of the host component (convex side) forloose type flanges, inside of the hub (convex side) for integral type flanges, and inside of thethickness for reverse and blind flanges. This does not affect calculations for certain flange types(such as loose flanges).

Pressure:The internal design pressure (pressure on the concave side). This value is gaugepressure. When “Solve for Thickness” is selected, this value is an input and should not include statichead.When “Solve for Pressure” is selected, this value is a result. In the latter case, it represents thetotal internal pressure (design pressure plus head) that the component can handle andmeet code inthe absence of any other loadings.

Static Head:The internal pressure (pressure on the concave side) resulting from the static head ofthe fluid. The user must determine this value and input it accordingly. It will be added to the Pressureinput and the sumwill be used in the internal pressure calculations for the component. This field willnot be present when “Solve for Thickness” is selected.

Include Pass Partition Rib Area:Select this box if the flange should account for the gasket reactionfrom pass partition plates in shell and tube heat exchanger plates. This field is only available forflanges added to heat exchanger designs.

64 | Page

Page 77: Design Calc s Manual

Appendix 2 Flange

External Pressure

Ext. Pressure:The external design pressure (pressure on the convex side). This value is gaugepressure. The software will adjust this input for static head.

Ext. Temperature:Themaximummeanmetal design temperature for the external pressure case asdefined in UG-20(a).

Ext. Static Head:The internal pressure (pressure on the concave side) resulting from the static headof the fluid that is present during the external pressure case. The user must determine this value andinput it accordingly; it will be subtracted from the "Ext. Pressure" input.

Int. Pressure axial load: Fa is the axial load (if any) that is present on the flanged connection duringthe internal pressure case. This is not due to internal pressure. This value is positive if the load ispulling the connection apart and negative if it is pushing the connection together. For instance, in avertical vessel with the bottom head bolted on, the value of Fa might be the weight of the bottomhead and the weight of any fluid pushing down on the bottom head; in this case the load would bepositive because it is pushing the connection apart. For a horizontal vessel with a bolted on head, Famight be 0 in that case even though internal pressure exists.

Loads

Int. Pressure moment:M is the overturningmoment (if any) that is present on the flanged connectionduring the pressure case indicated. This is not due to internal pressure. This value is never negative.For example, in a horizontal vessel with the right head bolted on, the value ofMa would be the forceof thematerial and content weight to the right of the bolted connection times the distance to thecenter of gravity of that weight. For a vertical vessel with a bolted on head,M might be 0 even thoughinternal pressure exists.

Ext. Pressure axial load: Fa is the axial load (if any) that is present on the flanged connection duringthe external pressure case. This is not due to external pressure. This is positive if the load is pullingthe connection apart and negative if it is pushing them together. For instance, in a vertical vessel withthe bottom head bolted on, the value of Fa might be the weight of the bottom head and the weight ofany fluid pushing down on the bottom head; in this case the load would be positive because it ispushing the connection apart. For a horizontal vessel with a bolted on head, Fa might be 0 in thatcase even though external pressure exists.

65 | Page

Page 78: Design Calc s Manual

Appendix 2 Flange

Ext. Pressure moment:M is the overturningmoment (if any) that is present on the flanged connectionduring the pressure case indicated. This is not due to internal pressure. This value is never negative.For example, in a horizontal vessel with the right head bolted on, the value ofMa would be the forceof thematerial and content weight to the right of the bolted connection times the distance to thecenter of gravity of that weight. For a vertical vessel with a bolted on head,M might be 0 even thoughexternal pressure exists.

Host/Flange

Flange Material

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

66 | Page

Page 79: Design Calc s Manual

Appendix 2 Flange

Modulus of Elasticity:Thematerial modulus of elasticity based on the TM tables fromSection II, PartD. The value shown here is based on the applicable TM table and the design temperature listed forthe internal pressure condition. In caseswhere the temperature listed for the internal pressurecondition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s TM table, the value will be zero.There are several materials that do not have clear matches in these tables. When a clear matchcannot be found by the software’s assignment criteria, the software will instead retrieve themodulusof elasticity from the external pressure chart assigned to thematerial. If this attempt also fails, thenthe value will be zero. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials. Manually editing this field willsever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Stress (Hot):Thematerial allowable stress at the temperature listed for the internal pressurecondition. When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSectionII, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 forBolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength fromTable U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowablestress tables for yield and creep governed cases. In caseswhere the temperature listed for theinternal pressure condition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s stress line, thevalue will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the software that the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and the connection to thematerial in thedatabase will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Stress (Cold):Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specifiedin the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value iscalculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value islimited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Factor B table: The external pressure table assigned to thematerial in the allowable stress tables inSection II, Part D. The table is used to determine the external pressure strength of the componentand also the longitudinal compressive strength. Selecting a Factor B table other than the oneassigned to thematerial will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

67 | Page

Page 80: Design Calc s Manual

Appendix 2 Flange

Ext. P Mod. of Elasticity:Thematerial modulus of elasticity based on the TM tables fromSection II,Part D. The value shown here is based on the applicable TM table and the design temperature listedfor the external pressure condition. In caseswhere the temperature listed for the external pressurecondition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s TM table, the value will be zero.There are several materials that do not have clear matches in these tables. When a clear matchcannot be found by the software’s assignment criteria, the software will instead retrieve themodulusof elasticity from the external pressure chart assigned to thematerial. If this attempt also fails, thenthe value will be zero. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials. Manually editing this field willsever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Cold Mod. of Elasticity:Thematerial modulus of elasticity based on the TM tables fromSection II,Part D. The value shown here is based on the applicable TM table at 70 °F (20 °C). There areseveral materials that do not have clear matches in these tables. When a clear match cannot befound by the software’s assignment criteria, the software will instead retrieve themodulus ofelasticity from the external pressure chart assigned to thematerial. If this attempt also fails, then thevalue will be zero. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials. Manually editing this field willsever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Host Information at Flange Location

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

68 | Page

Page 81: Design Calc s Manual

Appendix 2 Flange

Stress (Hot):Thematerial allowable stress at the temperature listed for the internal pressurecondition. When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSectionII, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 forBolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength fromTable U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowablestress tables for yield and creep governed cases. In caseswhere the temperature listed for theinternal pressure condition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s stress line, thevalue will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the software that the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and the connection to thematerial in thedatabase will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Stress (Cold):Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specifiedin the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value iscalculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value islimited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Inside/Outside Diameter:The host component diameter in the new condition. The selection of insideor outside in the "Use Diameter" field determineswhether this field refers to the inside or outsidediameter of the host component.

Wall Thickness:The host thickness in the new condition.

Dish Thickness:The thickness of the dish attached to the flange. This field is only available whenSpherical Dished Cover is selected as the "Design Type" (See page 63).

Dish radius: The inside crown radius of the dish attached to the flange. This field is only availablewhen Spherical Dished Cover is selected as the "Design Type" (See page 63).

Flange Welded to Wall:Select the box to enable the "Weld leg size" field on theGasket tab (See page

71). This is only available when Loose Type or Loose Type with Hub is selected as the "Design Type"(See page 63).

69 | Page

Page 82: Design Calc s Manual

Appendix 2 Flange

Does Flange have a Hub:Select the box to enable the "Thickness (g1)" and "Length (h)" fields on theGasket tab (See page 71). This is only available whenOptional Integral Type is selected as the "DesignType" (See page 63).

Other Calculations

Perform UCS-66 calculations: Selecting this check boxwill cause the software to performUCS-66toughness calculations on the component. This option is only available tomaterials that are classifiedasUCSmaterials per Table UCS-23.

Exemption Drop-down:WhenUCS-66 calculationswill not be performed (the software will not allowthese calculationswhen a non-UCSmaterial is used), an exemptionmust be entered. Theexemptionmay be typed in or selected from the drop-down options, but the user is responsible forensuring that the exemption selected is valid for thematerial, service, etc., in question.

MDMT Reductions

Take UCS-66(b) Reduction:Selecting this check boxwill take advantage of the reduction in allowedMDMT per UCS-66(b). This paragraph includes a calculation for the component whichcompensates for any excessmaterial thickness in the component.

Apply UCS-68(c):Selecting this check boxwill give an additional flat reduction in the allowedMDMTper UCS-68(c). Carefully review this paragraph as there are steep requirements for this exemption.

MDMT

MDMT Pressure:The net internal pressure (concave side) on the component coincident with theminimumdesignmetal temperature (MDMT). This includes static head.

MDMT Curve:The notes in Figure UCS-66 provide the criteria to assign theMDMT curve to thematerial and product form of the component. Curve A will give the least favorable allowedMDMTandCurve D will give themost favorable allowedMDMT.WhenUCSmaterials do not have a clearmatch using the criteria, they are assigned a conservative value of A. As the software cannotcurrently obtain possible improvements in curve rating due to heat treatment and other factors, theuser may override the curve value.

70 | Page

Page 83: Design Calc s Manual

Appendix 2 Flange

Gasket

Flange Neck Dimensions

Inside Diameter(B):For non-reverse integral flanges and reverse flanges, this is the ID of the flangehost. For non-reverse loose type flanges and spherically dished covers, this is the bore of the flange.

Inside Diameter(B’):Only applicable for reverse flanges, this value represents the bore of the reverseflange.

Mating Flange I.D.:The ID of themating flange that is exposed to pressure in blind flanges.

Head Factor C: This value is only applicable for blind flanges and it used to determine the requiredthickness for the blind flange. See UG-34 for more information.

Weld Efficiency:This value is only applicable for blind flanges and it used to determine the requiredthickness for the blind flange. See UG-34 for more information.

Lever arm (hR): The lever arm for the radial component of themembrane load of the sphericalsegmentHr. This field is only required for the design of a spherically dished cover for Figure 1-6(d).Themagnitude of themoment arm ismost easily determined by reviewing thementioned figure; it isthe axial distance from the centroid of the flange thickness to where themid thickness of the dishintersects the flange. If themid-thickness of the dish is closer to the gasket face of the flange (in theaxial direction) than the centroid of the flange is to the gasket face, the sign of hR is positive;otherwise, it is negative. It may bemore or less conservative to determine this value in the corrodedcondition.

Hub thickness (g0):The flange hub thickness at its thinnest point. This dimension will differdepending on the flange type and attachment detail (e.g., if the flange is a certain type, g0may bethe thickness of the host nozzle neck).

Weld leg size:The fillet weld between the back of the flange and the host. In several cases this value,or the sum of this value and the host thickness, act as the g1 value.

71 | Page

Page 84: Design Calc s Manual

Appendix 2 Flange

Flange face bevel size:This value is only available for lap joint flanges. It affects the calculation of themoment arms because the bevel size removes area of the flange that is acting on the lap.

Hub Thickness (g1):The flange hub thickness at its thickest point at the back of the flange. Thisdimension will differ depending on the flange type and attachment detail (e.g., if the flange is acertain type, g1may be the sum of the thickness of the host nozzle neck and the fillet weld on theback of the flange).

Hub Length (h):The hub length is the distance from the back of the flange to the point where the hubis thinnest. Some of the flange configurations have requirements on this length.

Gasket and Facing Details

Material:A description of the gasket that will appear on the report but will not directly affect theresults.

Type:A secondary description of the gasket. This will also appear on the report without directlyaffecting the results.

Facing Sketch:Review Table 2-5.2 fromAppendix 2 for more information. This is used to determinethe Effective GasketWidth, bo.

Seating Column:Review Table 2-5.2 fromAppendix 2 for more information. This is used todetermine the Effective GasketWidth, bo.

Factor m:Suggested values for the gasket factor may be obtained from Table 2-5.1 in Appendix 2.More accurate values should be available from the gasket manufacturer.

Seating Stress y:Suggested values for the gasket seating stressmay be obtained from Table 2-5.1in Appendix 2. More accurate values should be available from the gasket manufacturer.

72 | Page

Page 85: Design Calc s Manual

Appendix 2 Flange

O.D. contact face:The outside diameter of the gasket on the face of the flange. Depending on the"Facing Sketch," this valuemay be the actual outside diameter of the gasket or it may only reflect thediameter of actual contact with the flange (e.g., on a raised face flange where part of the gasketextends outside the raised face).

Gasket width (N):Thewidth of the gasket that is actually in contact with the flange. Depending on the"Facing Sketch," this valuemay be the actual width of the gasket or it may only reflect the width ofactual contact with the flange (e.g., on a raised face flange where part of the gasket extends outsidethe raised face).

Check seating conditions for self-energizing gaskets:Select this box to run the gasket seatingcalculations for self energizing gaskets. Appendix 2 has a gasket seating bolt loadW that can besignificantly higher than the operating bolt load. This bolt load is determined as 0.5*(Am+ Ab) whereAb is the actual total bolt cross-sectional area andAm is the higher of the area required for gasketseating or operating.W is used in the gasket seating check for determining stresses. Running thegasket seating case is optional because it may greatly increase the flange thickness due to theapparent excessive conservatism for gaskets of this type.

Load/Bolt Calcs

Bolting Material

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

73 | Page

Page 86: Design Calc s Manual

Appendix 2 Flange

Stress (Hot):Thematerial allowable stress at the temperature listed for the internal pressurecondition. When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSectionII, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 forBolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength fromTable U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowablestress tables for yield and creep governed cases. In caseswhere the temperature listed for theinternal pressure condition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s stress line, thevalue will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the software that the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and the connection to thematerial in thedatabase will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Stress (Cold):Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specifiedin the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value iscalculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value islimited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Load and Bolt Calculations

Is the Bolt Circle > the Flange OD:Select this box for flanges that are designed with slots instead ofbolt holes. Per Appendix 2, for flanges such as these, the flange outside diameter is the diameter tothe inside of the slots; in this case, the “effective outside diameter” could be less than the bolt circle.

Lock Wm Values to Minimum:Select this box to force the bolt load values,Wm1 andWm2, to theminimum required in Appendix 2. Clear this box to increase the bolt load values. For caseswhereflange pairs are used, these valuesmust bemanuallymatched across the two flanges and this boxshould be cleared.

Number of Bolts:The actual number of bolts, not the number of bolt holes.

Nominal Diameter:The nominal diameter of the bolt. This field will be completed automatically if theBolt Search is used to select the bolts.

74 | Page

Page 87: Design Calc s Manual

Appendix 2 Flange

Root Area:The bolt root area based on the smallest diameter on the bolt. This field will automaticallybe completed if the Bolt Search is used to select the bolts.

Bolt Hole Diameter:The bolt hole diameter, not the bolt circle diameter. This field will fill inautomatically if the Bolt Search is used to select the bolts; the value will be determined based on thebolt nominal diameter.

Bolt Size / Threads Per Inch: These fields are completed automatically when a bolt size is selectedfrom the Bolt Search.

Design operating Bolt Load Int. Pressure (Wm1):The internal pressure operating bolt load. Thisvalue will calculate to theminimum required by code once all the inputs to do so aremade. This valuemay be increased beyond theminimumwhen the “LockWmValues toMinimum” box is cleared.

Design Seating Bolt Load (Wm2): The gasket seating bolt load. This value will calculate to theminimum required by code once all the inputs to do so aremade. This valuemay be increasedbeyond theminimumwhen the “LockWmValues toMinimum” box is cleared.

Bolt Circle:The diameter of the circle that passes through the center of each bolt.

Outside Diameter:The flange outside diameter. For caseswhere slots are used instead of bolt holes,this value will be the diameter to the inside of the slot as referred to in the definition for “Is the BoltCircle > the FlangeOD.”

Nominal Flange Thickness:The flange thickness in the new condition.

Apply Bolt Correction Factor:Select Appendix 2 to determine if a correction factor is applicable perAppendix 2, Section VIII-I. This is ascertained by checking the chord length between the centers oftwo adjacent bolt holes; if a correction factor is required, themoment on the flange will bemultipliedby the correction factor. When Appendix 2 is selected, there is amaximum chord length that cannotbe exceeded for the design to pass.

75 | Page

Page 88: Design Calc s Manual

Appendix 2 Flange

Determining the Value of the Lever Arm on a Spherically DishedCover

hR represents the lever arm for the radial component of themembrane load of the sphericalsegmentHr. This field is only required for the design of a spherically dished cover for Figure 1-6(d).Themagnitude of themoment arm ismost easily determined by reviewing thementioned figure: it isthe axial distance from the centroid of the flange thickness to where themid thickness of the dishintersects the flange.

If themid-thickness of the dish is closer to the gasket face of the flange (in the axial direction) thanthe centroid of the flange is to the gasket face, the sign of hR is positive; otherwise, it is negative. Itmay bemore or less conservative to determine this value in the corroded condition.

The sign of themoment arm is based on whether or not themoment (Hr*hR) causes rotation of theflange around the bolt circle in the same direction as the gasket reaction. The gasket reaction willcause the flange to want to rotate around the bolt circle in such a fashion that the flange will want toopen up into the vessel with the bolt circle acting as a hinge. SinceHr acts in an inward radialdirection, we know that if themid-thickness of the flange is closer to the flange face (in the axialdirection) than the centroid of the flange thickness is to the gasket face, the resulting rotation willwant to open the flange face into to the vessel with the bolt circle acting as a hinge. As this is thesame direction of rotation as the gasket reaction, hRwould be positive in this case.

Reducing Number of Bolts Results in Flange Thickness Reduction

Appendix 2 flanges consider two bolt areas: Ab is the actual bolt cross-sectional area;Am is therequired total bolt cross-sectional area. The code requires Ab to be greater than or equal to Am, butit also penalizes excessive bolting.

The average of Ab and Am is used to determine the bolt load for gasket seating (W). As the actualbolt area increases, the value ofW increases; therefore, the bendingmoment on the flangeincreases and drives up the flange thickness.

Decreasing your bolt area, Ab, to as close to Am as is practical will help you get a thinner requiredflange thickness.

76 | Page

Page 89: Design Calc s Manual

77 | Page

STIFFENING R ING (return to Contents)

General Info 77

Design 79

General Info

Description:The label given for the component. It will appear in the component pane, the reportdialog, the summary pane, and at the top of the component report. This will default to the componenttype and component number. For example, the third nozzle for the vessel will start with a descriptionof Nozzle 3.

Mark: A shorthand reference for the component. It will also appear in the component report. Thedefault entry will be an abbreviation of the component type and the component number. Forexample, the second jacket shell for the vessel will start with amark SJ2.

Ring Stiffener Information

Design Temperature: Themaximummeanmetal design temperature for the external pressure caseas defined in UG-20(a).

Quantity: The number of stiffening rings. This is for information only and does not affect other fields.

Stiffener Outside: Select this box if the stiffener ring is outside the vessel wall. Clearing the boxindicates that the ring is inside the vessel and will be exposed to the "Corrosion Allowance."

Distance from Reference Line:The distance from the reference line datummeasured along the axisof the vessel. This field only affects the 3D drawing; it does not have an effect on the calculations orthe output.

Corrosion Allowance: The corrosion allowance on the stiffening ring. This field is only active whenthe "Stiffener Outside" box is cleared.

Page 90: Design Calc s Manual

Stiffening Ring

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Hot StressThematerial allowable stress at the temperature listed for the external pressurecondition. When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSectionII, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 forBolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength fromTable U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowablestress tables for yield and creep governed cases. In caseswhere the temperature listed for theinternal pressure condition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s stress line, thevalue will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the software that the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and the connection to thematerial in thedatabase will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Cold Stress:Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specified inthe vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value iscalculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value islimited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Factor B table: The external pressure table assigned to thematerial in the allowable stress tables inSection II, Part D. The table is used to determine the external pressure strength of the componentand also the longitudinal compressive strength. Selecting a Factor B table other than the oneassigned to thematerial will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

78 | Page

Page 91: Design Calc s Manual

Stiffening Ring

Design

Stiffener Type: Select the shape of the stiffening ring.

Stiffener Information

Ls:The vessel length that the stiffener is designed to support. This is determined as half the lengthfrom the center of the stiffener to the next line of support on one side plus half the length from thecenter of the stiffener to the next line of support on the other side.

As:The cross-sectional area of the ring stiffener by itself. This value is calculated unless the"Stiffener Type" is User Defined.

d1, d2, t1, t2:The dimensions for the cross-sectional area of the ring stiffener. These values arerepresented in the picture in the input form andmost are available for input except when the"Stiffener Type" is User Defined.

Description: A description of the shape of the stiffener. This field will be automatically completedwhen the Structural Shape Search is used to select a standard structural shape.

Available Moment of Inertia:Themoment of inertia of the cross-sectional area of the ring stiffener byitself around its neutral axis parallel to the shell axis. This value is calculated unless the "StiffenerType" is User Defined.

Distance – Shell to Neutral Axis:The distance from the outside of the host shell wall to the neutralaxis of the ring stiffener cross-section. This value is calculated unless the "Stiffener Type" is UserDefined.

79 | Page

Page 92: Design Calc s Manual

80 | Page

CLAMP (return to Contents)

General Info 80

Hub 81

Clamp 83

Gasket 84

Bolting 85

Stress Ratios 87

General Info

Drawing Number: The drawing number associated with the component. This does not refer to anydrawings that are generated in the software and it is listed here for the user's reference. It will defaultto the drawing number input on the vessel screen.

Mark: A shorthand reference for the component. It will also appear in the component report. Thedefault entry will be an abbreviation of the component type and the component number. Forexample, the second jacket shell for the vessel will start with amark SJ2.

Clamp Description:The label given for the component. It will appear in the component pane, thereport dialog, the summary pane, and at the top of the component report. This will default to thecomponent type and component number. For example, the second clamp for the vessel will startwith a description of Clamp 2.

Design Pressure:The internal design pressure (pressure on the concave side). This value is gaugepressure. When “Solve for Thickness” is selected, this value is an input and should not include statichead.When “Solve for Pressure” is selected, this value is a result. In the latter case, it represents thetotal internal pressure (design pressure plus head) that the component can handle andmeet code inthe absence of any other loadings.

Page 93: Design Calc s Manual

Clamp

Static Head:The internal pressure (pressure on the concave side) resulting from the static head ofthe fluid. The user must determine this value and input it accordingly. It will be added to the Pressureinput and the sumwill be used in the internal pressure calculations for the component. This field willnot be present when “Solve for Thickness” is selected.

Temperature:Themaximummeanmetal design temperature for the internal pressure case asdefined in UG-20(a).

CA:Corrosion allowance on the inside of the component (concave side).

Hub Configuration / Lug Configuration:Select a configuration option in each section. For moreinformation on the choices listed, refer to the figures in Appendix 24.

Hub

Hub Information

Though the values in this section are best defined in the figure provided, a few are listed below tosupply additional clarification.

Clamp Shoulder Angle: Indicated by Phi (Φ) in the figure. The code limits this value to amaximumof40 degrees. See Appendix 24-3 for more information.

Friction Angle:According to Appendix 24-4, this value is set by themanufacturer and is based ontesting.

Hub Transition Angle: Indicated by alpha (α) in the figure. The code limits this value to amaximumof45 degrees. See Appendix 24-3 for more information.

81 | Page

Page 94: Design Calc s Manual

Clamp

Hub Material

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

Hot StressThematerial allowable stress at the temperature listed for the external pressurecondition. When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSectionII, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 forBolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength fromTable U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowablestress tables for yield and creep governed cases. In caseswhere the temperature listed for theinternal pressure condition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s stress line, thevalue will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the software that the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and the connection to thematerial in thedatabase will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

82 | Page

Page 95: Design Calc s Manual

Clamp

Cold Stress:Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specified inthe vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value iscalculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value islimited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Factor B table: The external pressure table assigned to thematerial in the allowable stress tables inSection II, Part D. The table is used to determine the external pressure strength of the componentand also the longitudinal compressive strength. Selecting a Factor B table other than the oneassigned to thematerial will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Clamp

Clamp Information

The values in this section are best defined in the figure provided.

Clamp Material

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

83 | Page

Page 96: Design Calc s Manual

Clamp

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

Hot StressThematerial allowable stress at the temperature listed for the external pressurecondition. When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSectionII, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 forBolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength fromTable U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowablestress tables for yield and creep governed cases. In caseswhere the temperature listed for theinternal pressure condition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s stress line, thevalue will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the software that the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and the connection to thematerial in thedatabase will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Cold Stress:Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specified inthe vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value iscalculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value islimited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Factor B table: The external pressure table assigned to thematerial in the allowable stress tables inSection II, Part D. The table is used to determine the external pressure strength of the componentand also the longitudinal compressive strength. Selecting a Factor B table other than the oneassigned to thematerial will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Gasket

Configuration:TheRing Type configuration is based on Appendix 2 and assumes nometal to metalcontact outside the bolt circle. The Full Face configuration is based on Taylor Forge Bulletin #502and is very similar to Appendix 2; the exception is that the gasket covers the whole face of contact.

84 | Page

Page 97: Design Calc s Manual

Clamp

Material:A description of the gasket that will appear on the report but will not directly affect theresults.

Type:A secondary description of the gasket. This will also appear on the report without directlyaffecting the results.

Facing Sketch:Review Table 2-5.2 fromAppendix 2 for more information. This is used to determinethe Effective GasketWidth, bo.

Seating Column:Review Table 2-5.2 fromAppendix 2 for more information. This is used todetermine the Effective GasketWidth, bo.

Factor m:Suggested values for the gasket factor may be obtained from Table 2-5.1 in Appendix 2.More accurate values should be available from the gasket manufacturer.

Seating Stress y:Suggested values for the gasket seating stressmay be obtained from Table 2-5.1in Appendix 2. More accurate values should be available from the gasket manufacturer.

O.D. contact face:The outside diameter of the gasket on the face of the clamp. Depending on the"Facing Sketch," this valuemay be the actual outside diameter of the gasket or it may only reflect thediameter of actual contact with the clamp.

Gasket width (N):Thewidth of the gasket that is actually in contact with the clamp. Depending on the"Facing Sketch," this valuemay be the actual width of the gasket or it may only reflect the width ofactual contact with the clamp.

Check seating conditions for self-energizing gaskets:Select this box to run the gasket seatingcalculations for self energizing gaskets. Sometimes this will govern the clamp design.

Bolting

Clamp Lug

The values in this section are best defined in the figure provided.

85 | Page

Page 98: Design Calc s Manual

Clamp

Bolting Material

Number of Bolts:The actual number of bolts, not the number of bolt holes.

Nominal Diameter:The nominal diameter of the bolt. This field will be completed automatically if theBolt Search is used to select the bolts.

Root Area:The bolt root area based on the smallest diameter on the bolt. This field will automaticallybe completed if the Bolt Search is used to select the bolts.

Bolt Size / Threads Per Inch: These fields are completed automatically when a bolt size is selectedfrom the Bolt Search.

Bolt Radius:The radial distance from the connection centerline to the center of the bolts.

Moment Arm: The radial distance from the effective clamp-hub reaction circle to the circle on whichthe load HGacts. If Full Face is selected under "Gasket Type" (See page 84), this value is zero.

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

86 | Page

Page 99: Design Calc s Manual

Clamp

Hot StressThematerial allowable stress at the temperature listed for the external pressurecondition. When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSectionII, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 forBolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength fromTable U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowablestress tables for yield and creep governed cases. In caseswhere the temperature listed for theinternal pressure condition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s stress line, thevalue will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the software that the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and the connection to thematerial in thedatabase will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Cold Stress:Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specified inthe vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value iscalculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value islimited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Stress Ratios

This tab displays themultiple calculated stress values divided by their corresponding allowablestresses. Ratios of 1.0 or less are considered passing.When all of the stress ratios are passing, thedesign is passing. These values are listed here for the user's convenience.

87 | Page

Page 100: Design Calc s Manual

88 | Page

COMPONENT ORDER TROUBLESHOOTING

Successful component creation relies on correct component positioning. This article will cover thereasonswhy componentsmay be unavailable or may be appearing in incorrect locations.

Component is in the wrong location

If a component is appearing in an incorrect position in the 3D Render, the component ismost likely inthe wrong location in the component tree.

For vertical vessels, components should appear in the tree in the order they should appear on thevessel from top to bottom. For horizontal vessels, components should be in order from left to right.Tomove a component in the component tree, select the desired component and click the up or downarrow to the left of the tree.

Page 101: Design Calc s Manual

Component Order Troubleshooting

If a head is still appearing in the wrong location after beingmoved in the component tree, open thehead by double-clicking the component on the tree or by right-clicking it and selecting "Edit." Makesure the location specified on theGeneral tab of the Head window matches the desired location.More information about the Head window can be found here.

Component is unavailable

If a component is disabled, themost likely reason is that you are attempting to add the component toan invalid location. Certain componentsmust be added to a host while others can only be added tothe vessel itself. Each new component will be added to the location selected in the component treewhen it is created.

In the image below, a shell is selected; only components that can be added to that shell are availablein the component menu.

89 | Page

Page 102: Design Calc s Manual

Component Order Troubleshooting

In the image below, the vessel is selected; only components that can be added to the vessel itself areavailable in the component menu.

90 | Page

Page 103: Design Calc s Manual

Component Order Troubleshooting

Certain components can only be added to specific types of vessels. For example, the entireExchanger menu is disabled if the vessel is not a Heat Exchanger. In the image below, only Saddleis available in the Structural menu because the vessel was created as a horizontal vessel with asaddle support.

91 | Page

Page 104: Design Calc s Manual

92 | Page

TUBESHEET

(F IXED , FLOATING , AND U-TUBE ) (return to Contents)

General 93

Shell 93

Shell Band 96

Channel 97

Tube 99

Lanes 103

Tubesheet 103

Floating 106

Conditions 109

Tube/TS Joints 113

MDMT 114

Efficient Tubesheet Creation Tips 114

Tubesheet Troubleshooting 115

Page 105: Design Calc s Manual

Tubesheet (Fixed, Floating, and U-Tube)

General

Description:The label given for the component. It will appear in the component pane, the reportdialog, the summary pane, and at the top of the component report. This will default to the componenttype and component number. For example, the third nozzle for the vessel will start with a descriptionof Nozzle 3.

Mark: A shorthand reference for the component. It will also appear in the component report. Thedefault entry will be an abbreviation of the component type and the component number. Forexample, the second jacket shell for the vessel will start with amark SJ2.

Qty: Indicates that themathematics assume two fixed tubesheets are present with one at each endof the tube bundle. This field is only available to Fixed Tubesheet designs.

Exchanger Type:The selected option will limit the Floating configuration to those allowed in figureUHX-14.1 and it will affect the calculation of Pe. This field is only available for Floating Tubesheetdesigns.

Configuration:Select a configuration from the options presented. Floating Tubesheet designswillhave stationary and floating configurations.

Shell

Shell Information

Several of these fields will be automatically completed based on the host shell information when theShell Search is used. The content of those fields will be locked.

Description:The label given for the component.

Design Pressure (Ps):The shell side internal design pressure.

Design Pressure (Ps,vac.):The shell side external design pressure.

93 | Page

Page 106: Design Calc s Manual

Tubesheet (Fixed, Floating, and U-Tube)

Static Head:The internal pressure (pressure on the concave side) resulting from the static head ofthe fluid. The user must determine this value and input it accordingly. It will be added to the Pressureinput and the sumwill be used in the internal pressure calculations for the component. This field willnot be present when “Solve for Thickness” is selected.

Corrosion Allowance:Corrosion allowance on the inside of the component (concave side).

Temperature:Themaximummeanmetal design temperature for the tubesheet design loadingcases.

Esw:Available for Fixed Tubesheet designs, this is the girth seam joint efficiency (longitudinal stress)for the shell.

Thickness:This value is in the new condition. For the component to pass, this valuemust be at leastthe sum of the thickness necessary for pressure and temperature, corrosion allowances, andforming allowances or under-tolerances. If the thickness necessary for pressure and temperature isless than the thickness required byUG-16, the nominal thicknessmust be at least the sum of theUG-16 thickness and the tolerances, etc. In some cases, under-tolerance is not considered (e.g., fornozzle reinforcement, the under-tolerance of the nozzle neck is ignored). When “Solve forThickness” is selected, the software will determine the smallest standard size that passes. The useris able tomanually edit this value.

Inside Diameter:The component diameter in the new condition.

Liquid Density:Refers to the shell side liquid. This is for information only.

Per UG-23(e), calculate using:Select whether to calculate the allowable primary plus secondarystress using 3xS or 2xSy.Caution: If 3xS is selected and the value of S is determined at 90% of Sy,the allowable primary plus secondary stresswill be 2.7xSy.

Consider Effect of Different shell material/thickness adjacent to tubesheet:For Fixed Tubesheetdesigns, select this box if the shell has a different thickness or material adjacent to the tubesheet; thisis the same as using a shell band near the tubesheet (See page 96). This is only applicable forconfigurationswhere the shell is integral with the tubesheet (Configurations a, b,and c) (See page 93).

94 | Page

Page 107: Design Calc s Manual

Tubesheet (Fixed, Floating, and U-Tube)

Shell Material

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

B-Table: The external pressure table assigned to thematerial in the allowable stress tables inSection II, Part D. The table is used to determine the external pressure strength of the componentand also the longitudinal compressive strength. Selecting a Factor B table other than the oneassigned to thematerial will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Poisson:Poisson's ratio for the selectedmaterial

(Tsm):Themean shell temperature along the shell length as expected during operation. It isgenerally not conservative to substitute the shell design temperature for Tsm.

(Ts'):Themetal temperature of the shell at the tubesheet as expected during operation. It is usuallynot conservative to substitute the shell design temperature for Ts'. This value is only required forradial differential thermal expansion calculations.

95 | Page

Page 108: Design Calc s Manual

Tubesheet (Fixed, Floating, and U-Tube)

Shell Band

Several of these fields will be automatically completed when the Shell Search is used. The content ofthose fields will be locked.

Shell Band Information

Description:The label given for the component.

Length of Differing Thickness (L1), (L'1): Length of shell bands adjacent to the tubesheets.

Thickness (ts,1):Shell thickness adjacent to the tubesheets. The calculations assume that this is thesame value for both shell bands.

Per UG-23(e), calculate using:Select whether to calculate the allowable primary plus secondarystress using 3xS or 2xSy.Caution: If 3xS is selected and the value of S is determined at 90% of Sy,the allowable primary plus secondary stresswill be 2.7xSy.

Esw1:Available for Fixed Tubesheet designs, this is the girth seam joint efficiency (longitudinalstress) for the shell band.

Shell Band Material

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

96 | Page

Page 109: Design Calc s Manual

Tubesheet (Fixed, Floating, and U-Tube)

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

B-Table: The external pressure table assigned to thematerial in the allowable stress tables inSection II, Part D. The table is used to determine the external pressure strength of the componentand also the longitudinal compressive strength. Selecting a Factor B table other than the oneassigned to thematerial will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Poisson:Poisson's ratio for the selectedmaterial

Channel

Channel Information

Several of these fields will be automatically completed based on the host channel shell/ channelhead information when theChannel Shell Search or Channel Head Search is used. The content ofthose fields will be locked.

Description:The label given for the component.

Channel Type:Select Channel Shell or Channel Head. At this time, only Hemispherical ChannelHeads are available for use in tubesheets per ASME Section 8, Div 1, Part UHX.

Temperature:Themaximummeanmetal design temperature for the internal pressure case asdefined in UG-20(a).

97 | Page

Page 110: Design Calc s Manual

Tubesheet (Fixed, Floating, and U-Tube)

Corrosion Allowance:Corrosion allowance on the inside of the component (concave side).

Inside Diameter:The component diameter in the new condition.

Thickness:This value is in the new condition. For the component to pass, this valuemust be at leastthe sum of the thickness necessary for pressure and temperature, corrosion allowances, andforming allowances or under-tolerances. If the thickness necessary for pressure and temperature isless than the thickness required byUG-16, the nominal thicknessmust be at least the sum of theUG-16 thickness and the tolerances, etc. In some cases, under-tolerance is not considered (e.g., fornozzle reinforcement, the under-tolerance of the nozzle neck is ignored). When “Solve forThickness” is selected, the software will determine the smallest standard size that passes. The useris able tomanually edit this value.

Liquid Density:Refers to the shell side liquid. This is for information only.

Per UG-23(e), calculate using:Select whether to calculate the allowable primary plus secondarystress using 3xS or 2xSy.Caution: If 3xS is selected and the value of S is determined at 90% of Sy,the allowable primary plus secondary stresswill be 2.7xSy.

Channel Material

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

98 | Page

Page 111: Design Calc s Manual

Tubesheet (Fixed, Floating, and U-Tube)

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

B-Table: The external pressure table assigned to thematerial in the allowable stress tables inSection II, Part D. The table is used to determine the external pressure strength of the componentand also the longitudinal compressive strength. Selecting a Factor B table other than the oneassigned to thematerial will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Poisson:Poisson's ratio for the selectedmaterial

(Tc'):Themetal temperature of the channel at the tubesheet as expected during operation. It isgenerally not conservative to substitute the channel design temperature for Tc'. This value is onlyrequired for radial differential thermal expansion calculations.

Tube

Several of these fields will be automatically completed based on the host tube information when theCustom Tube Browser is used. The content of those fields will be locked.

Tube Information

Design Pressure (Pt):The tube side internal design pressure.

Design Pressure (Pt,vac.):The tube side external design pressure. This is not the external designpressure on the tubes themselves.

Temperature:Themaximummeanmetal design temperature for the internal pressure case asdefined in UG-20(a).

Liquid Density:Refers to the shell side liquid. This is for information only.

99 | Page

Page 112: Design Calc s Manual

Tubesheet (Fixed, Floating, and U-Tube)

Nominal Pitch:The center to center distance between adjacent tubes. The calculations assume thatthis value is uniform.

Length:The tube length between outer tubesheet faces.

Number of Tube Holes:For fixed and floating tubesheet exchangers, this valuematches the numberof tubes and is consistent for both tubesheets in the exchanger. For U-Tube tubesheet exchangers,this value is the number of U-tubesmultiplied by two.

Nominal Tube OD:The nominal outside diameter of the tube.

Wall Thickness:The new wall thickness of the tube.

Tube to Tubesheet Intersection:Select the location where the tube intersects the tubesheet.

Inside Corrosion: The corrosion allowance for the inside of the tubes.

External Corrosion:The corrosion allowance for the outside of the tubes.

Tube hole diameter:When the "Tube to Tubesheet Intersection" is Backside of tubesheet, this is thediameter of the tube hole in the tubesheet.

Ap:Total area on the tubesheet that is enclosed by the step-wise perimeter, Cp.

Cp:Perimeter of the tube layout measured in stepwise increments from center-to-center of theouter-most tubes. See figure UHX-12.2 for reference.

Pattern:Select whether the hole pattern is an equilateral triangle or a square.

100 | Page

Page 113: Design Calc s Manual

Tubesheet (Fixed, Floating, and U-Tube)

Span

Largest Unsupported Span: If there are no tube supports, enter the length of tubes betweentubesheets. If only one tube support exists, enter the greater of the lengths between the tubesheetsand the tube support. If there aremultiple tube supports, compare the longest length of tubebetween two tube supports to the longest length of tube between a tubesheet and a tube supportmultiplied by 0.8. If the former is greater, enter that value; if the latter is greater, enter the actuallength between the tubesheet and tube support (do not multiply it by 0.8).

As an example, consider a design with three tube supports; the distances between the tube supportsare 5 inches and 10 inches and the spans between the tubesheets and adjacent tube supports are15 inches and 11 inches. Compare 10 inches to 0.8*15 inches. As 12 is greater than 10, the span of15 incheswill be the value entered in this field. In addition, Tubesheet and Tube Support would bechosen in the "Unsupported Span is Between" field for this example.

Unsupported Span is Between:Select the location of the largest unsupported span.This is for thepurpose of determining the constant k which has a value of 0.6 for unsupported spans between twotubesheets, 0.8 for unsupported spans between a tubesheet and a tube support, and 1.0 forunsupported spans between two tube supports.

Expansion Ratio

Tube Expansion Depth Ratio:The ratio of tube expansion length in the tubesheet to the tubesheetthickness. This value is based on the new dimensions. If the tube is not expanded to the tubesheet,enter 0.

Exp. Length of Tube in Tubesheet:Select the box to enable this field. Clear the box to enable the"Tube Expansion Depth Ratio" field. When this box is selected, enter the length the tube is expandedinto the tubesheet in the new condition.

101 | Page

Page 114: Design Calc s Manual

Tubesheet (Fixed, Floating, and U-Tube)

Tube Material

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

B-Table: The external pressure table assigned to thematerial in the allowable stress tables inSection II, Part D. The table is used to determine the external pressure strength of the componentand also the longitudinal compressive strength. Selecting a Factor B table other than the oneassigned to thematerial will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Poisson:Poisson's ratio for the selectedmaterial

(Ttm):Themean tube temperature along the tube length as expected during operation; thisconsiders the entire tube bundle. It is generally not conservative to substitute the tube designtemperature for Ttm.

102 | Page

Page 115: Design Calc s Manual

Tubesheet (Fixed, Floating, and U-Tube)

Lanes

Untubed Lanes

Untubed Lane Configurations:Select the number of untubed lanes.

Center-to-center Distance between adjacent rows of untubed lane:Enter the distance between tuberows immediately adjacent to the untubed lane on opposite sides. This distancemust not exceed 4p.See Figure UHX-11.2 for more information.

Length of Untubed Lane:Enter the length of each untubed lane. This ismeasured along the center ofthe lane and terminates at the diameter of the outer tube limit. See figure UHX-11.2 for moreinformation.

Tubesheet

Several of these fields will be automatically completed when the Flange Search or the ExpansionJoint Search is used. The content of those fields will be locked.

Tubesheet Information

Temperature:Themaximummeanmetal design temperature for the internal pressure case asdefined in UG-20(a).

Outside Diameter:The component diameter in the new condition.

Bolt Load: The flange design bolt load. This applies to configurations b, c, d, e, f, B, C, and D.Wsrepresents the shell side design bolt load andWc represents the tube side design bolt load (See page

93).

Bolt Circle:The diameter of the circle that passes through the center of each bolt.

103 | Page

Page 116: Design Calc s Manual

Tubesheet (Fixed, Floating, and U-Tube)

Use an Expansion Joint:On Fixed Tubesheet designs, select this box to indicate the use of anexpansion joint. This will enable theKj andDj fields.

Axial Rigidity:The axial rigidity of the expansion joint, expressed as total force over elongation. Thisfield is only applicable when an expansion joint is used.

Operating Bolt Load:The internal pressure operating bolt load. This applies to configurations b, c, d,e, f, B, C, and D.Wm1s represents the shell side operating bolt load andWm1c represents the tubeside operating bolt load.

Radial Distance:Themoment arm from the bolt circle to the diameter on which the gasket reactionacts.

De:Themaximumof the shell and channel gasket inside diameters, but not less than themaximumof the shell and channel flange inside diameters. If tubesheet acts as LAP, this is the diameter wherethe shear stress is acting. This field applies to configurations c, d, and f.

Shell side Corrosion Allowance:Corrosion allowance on the shell-side face of the tubesheet.

Channel side Corrosion Allowance:Corrosion allowance on the tube-side face of the tubesheet.

Per UG-23(e), calculate using:Select whether to calculate the allowable primary plus secondarystress using 3xS or 2xSy.Caution: If 3xS is selected and the value of S is determined at 90% of Sy,the allowable primary plus secondary stresswill be 2.7xSy.

Pass Partition Groove Depth:The thickness removed on the tube-side face of the tubesheet toaccommodate pass-partitions.

Radius to Outermost Tube Hole Center: The distancemeasured from the center of the tubesheetface to the center of the farthest tube-hole.

Midpoint of contact between flange and tubesheet:The diameter to themidpoint of contact betweenthe lap flange and the tubesheet. This field is only available for configurations c, f, and C.

104 | Page

Page 117: Design Calc s Manual

Tubesheet (Fixed, Floating, and U-Tube)

Expansion Joint Convolution ID:The inside diameter of the expansion joint at its convolution height.This field is only applicable when an expansion joint is used.

Nominal Thickness:This value is in the new condition. For the component to pass, this valuemust beat least the sum of the thickness necessary for pressure and temperature, corrosion allowances, andforming allowances or under-tolerances. If the thickness necessary for pressure and temperature isless than the thickness required byUG-16, the nominal thicknessmust be at least the sum of theUG-16 thickness and the tolerances, etc. In some cases, under-tolerance is not considered (e.g., fornozzle reinforcement, the under-tolerance of the nozzle neck is ignored). When “Solve forThickness” is selected, the software will determine the smallest standard size that passes. The useris able tomanually edit this value.

Perform:Select which calculation procedure to perform. Elastic Plastic Calcs only apply toconfigurationswith an integral shell or channel (a, b, c, e, f and A) and to the design loading cases (1,2, and 3) under specific circumstances. Simply Supported only apply to configurations in which thetubesheet is integral with the shell or channel (a, b, c, e, f and A) and to the design loading cases (1,2, and 3) under specific circumstances; the simply supported calculations do not consider the effectof the stiffness of the integral channel or shell in the determination of the tubesheet stresses.

Extended as Flange:Necessary for tubesheets that have holes for through bolting. This is selectedby default. This field is only used for configuration d.

Info Used for Extension Calculations:Options are Shell, Channel, and Shell/Channel. WhenShell/Channel is selected, it will use the greatest value between them. Shell/Channel is selected bydefault.This field is only used for configuration d.

Tubesheet Material

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

105 | Page

Page 118: Design Calc s Manual

Tubesheet (Fixed, Floating, and U-Tube)

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

B-Table: The external pressure table assigned to thematerial in the allowable stress tables inSection II, Part D. The table is used to determine the external pressure strength of the componentand also the longitudinal compressive strength. Selecting a Factor B table other than the oneassigned to thematerial will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Poisson:Poisson's ratio for the selectedmaterial

(T'):Themetal temperature of the tubesheet at the rim as expected during operation. It is usually notconservative to substitute the tubesheet design temperature for T'.

Floating

Floating Side Information

Outside Diameter:The component diameter in the new condition.

Inside Diameter:The component diameter in the new condition.

Channel Type:Select Channel Shell or Channel Head. At this time, only Hemispherical ChannelHeads are available for use in tubesheets per ASME Section 8, Div 1, Part UHX.

106 | Page

Page 119: Design Calc s Manual

Tubesheet (Fixed, Floating, and U-Tube)

Operating Bolt Load:The internal pressure operating bolt load. This applies to configurations b, c, d,e, f, B, C, and D.Wm1s represents the shell side operating bolt load andWm1c represents the tubeside operating bolt load.

Radial Distance:Themoment arm from the bolt circle to the diameter on which the gasket reactionacts.

Bolt Circle:The diameter of the circle that passes through the center of each bolt.

Channel Thin Out:Thematerial thickness lost to the forming process. To determine theminimumthickness after forming, the un-corroded nominal thickness is reduced by this amount.

(Defl):The floating channel gasket inside diameter, but not less than the floating channel flangeinside diameter. If tubesheet acts as LAP, this is the diameter where the shear stress is acting. Thisapplies to configuration C only.

Corrosion Allowance:Corrosion allowance on the inside of the component (concave side).

Thickness:This value is in the new condition. For the component to pass, this valuemust be at leastthe sum of the thickness necessary for pressure and temperature, corrosion allowances, andforming allowances or under-tolerances. If the thickness necessary for pressure and temperature isless than the thickness required byUG-16, the nominal thicknessmust be at least the sum of theUG-16 thickness and the tolerances, etc. In some cases, under-tolerance is not considered (e.g., fornozzle reinforcement, the under-tolerance of the nozzle neck is ignored). When “Solve forThickness” is selected, the software will determine the smallest standard size that passes. The useris able tomanually edit this value.

Gasket Load Diameter:Diameter of the gasket load reaction.

Bolt Load: The flange design bolt load. This applies to configurations b, c, d, e, f, B, C, and D.Wsrepresents the shell side design bolt load andWc represents the tube side design bolt load (See page

93).

107 | Page

Page 120: Design Calc s Manual

Tubesheet (Fixed, Floating, and U-Tube)

Midpoint of contact between flange and tubesheet:The diameter to themidpoint of contact betweenthe lap flange and the tubesheet. This field is only available for configurations c, f, and C.

Per UG-23(e), calculate using:Select whether to calculate the allowable primary plus secondarystress using 3xS or 2xSy.Caution: If 3xS is selected and the value of S is determined at 90% of Sy,the allowable primary plus secondary stresswill be 2.7xSy.

Floating Channel Material

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

B-Table: The external pressure table assigned to thematerial in the allowable stress tables inSection II, Part D. The table is used to determine the external pressure strength of the componentand also the longitudinal compressive strength. Selecting a Factor B table other than the oneassigned to thematerial will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Poisson:Poisson's ratio for the selectedmaterial

108 | Page

Page 121: Design Calc s Manual

Tubesheet (Fixed, Floating, and U-Tube)

Conditions

The conditions grid is a repository for tubesheet design cases. Values entered here will overrulevalues entered on previous tabs. For example, if shell pressure on this tab is 15 PSI and shellpressure on the shell tab is 50 PSI, 15 PSI will be used in the calculations; however, a value enteredon the conditions grid will not change the value on any other tab.

The values entered on this tab default based on settings from other tabs. If temperatures, pressures,or materials are changed on the other tabs, the values on this tab will update even if theyweremanually changed. If the values on this grid aremanually changed, theywill remain the same until achange on another tab or amanual adjustment occurs.

Grid Navigation

Previous Record

Next Record

Insert a New Record

Edit the Current Record

Delete the Current Record

Thermal Case: This field is only available for the 2013 code year and later. If this box is selected,thermal loadswill be considered and the case treated as an operating case.

Loading Type: There are several options here including Design, Operating, Startup, and Shutdown.All of these Loading Types should be considered and are ultimately defined by the designer. The2010 and 2011 code year defines thermal expansion by the Loading Case (1-3 do not consider it and4-7 do). The 2013 code year and later uses thermal expansion when the Thermal Case check box isselected. U-tube Tubesheet designs do not consider thermal expansion; however, these otherLoading Typesmay still need to be considered. For thermal loadings plus pressure cases, theoperating temperaturesmay be used to determine thematerial properties.

Loading Case:For the 2010 Code Edition and the 2011 Code Addenda, the loading case options are1 – 7 (limited to 1 – 3 for U-Tube Tubesheet design).

109 | Page

Page 122: Design Calc s Manual

Tubesheet (Fixed, Floating, and U-Tube)

The 2010 and 2011 code year defines the load cases as follows:

1. Tube Side internal pressure and/or Vacuum; Shell Side Pressure set to 0; no thermal expansion

2. Tube Side Pressure set to 0; Shell Side internal pressure and/or Vacuum; no thermal expansion

3. Tube Side internal pressure and/or Vacuum; Shell Side internal pressure and/or Vacuum; no thermalexpansion

4. Tube Side Pressure set to 0; Shell Side Pressure set to 0; thermal expansion

5. Tube Side internal pressure and/or Vacuum; Shell Side Pressure set to 0; thermal expansion

6. Tube Side Pressure set to 0; Shell Side internal pressure and/or Vacuum; thermal expansion

7. Tube Side internal pressure and/or Vacuum; Shell Side internal pressure and/or Vacuum; thermalexpansion

For the 2013 Edition and later, the options are 1-4. The 2013 code year and later defines the loadcases as follows (thermal is defined by Thermal Case check box):

1. Tube Side highest pressure; Shell Side lowest pressure

2. Tube Side lowest pressure; Shell Side highest pressure

3. Tube Side highest pressure; Shell Side highest pressure

4. Tube Side lowest pressure; Shell Side lowest pressure

CA: This option allows you to consider corrosion allowance, to not consider corrosion allowance, orto check both the corroded and uncorroded cases. UHX in Section VIII-I and 4.18 in Section VIII-IIboth require that both the corroded and uncorroded conditions be considered. All new rows in theconditions grid will default to Both. It may be valid to only consider certain cases as corroded oruncorroded. For example, the hydrotest Loading Typemay only require the uncorroded condition.

Vacuum: If “Yes” is selected, then the number of permutations of calculations for this row in the gridwill double for code years 2010 and 2011. For example, if loading case 1 is specified for Code year2010 or 2011, and “Yes” is picked for this value, the calculationswill be run with the tube sidepressure set to the internal pressure and again with the tube side pressure set to the negative tubevacuum pressure. This same logic applies for the 2013 and later years for the thermal cases only.This is ignored for the non-thermal cases in years 2013 and later.

110 | Page

Page 123: Design Calc s Manual

Tubesheet (Fixed, Floating, and U-Tube)

Radial Diff. Thermal Calcs.:This column is only available for Fixed and Floating tubesheet designs. Itonly affects the thermal loading conditions/cases. If “Yes” is picked, it will consider the effect ofRadial Thermal Expansion in addition to the axial thermal expansion that is already considered in thethermal loading conditions/cases.

Shell Pressure:The shell side internal design pressure for Design Cases. Thismay be an operatingpressure for the other cases (e.g., Operating, Startup, Shutdown, etc).

Shell Vacuum:The shell side external design pressure for Design Cases. Thismay be an operatingexternal pressure for the other cases (e.g., Operating, Startup, Shutdown, etc).

Shell Ts:The shell material maximummeanmetal design temperature for Design Cases. Thismaybe an operating temperature for the other cases (e.g., Operating, Startup, Shutdown, etc).

Shell Tsm:Themean shell temperature along the shell length as expected during the case underconsideration (e.g., Operating, Startup, Shutdown, etc). It is generally not conservative to substitutethe shell design temperature for Tsm.

Shell Ts':Themetal temperature of the shell at the tubesheet as expected during the case underconsideration (e.g., Operating, Startup, Shutdown, etc). It is usually not conservative to substitutethe shell design temperature for Ts'. This value is only required for radial differential thermalexpansion calculations.

Tube Pressure:The tube side internal design pressure for Design Cases. Thismay be an operatingpressure for the other cases (e.g., Operating, Startup, Shutdown, etc).

Tube Vacuum:The tube side external design pressure for Design Cases. Thismay be an operatingexternal pressure for the other cases (e.g., Operating, Startup, Shutdown, etc).

Tube Tt: The tubematerial maximummeanmetal design temperature for Design Cases. Thismaybe an operating temperature for the other cases (e.g., Operating, Startup, Shutdown, etc).

111 | Page

Page 124: Design Calc s Manual

Tubesheet (Fixed, Floating, and U-Tube)

Tube Ttm:Themean tube temperature along the tube length as expected during the case underconsideration (e.g., Operating, Startup, Shutdown, etc); this considers the entire tube bundle. It isgenerally not conservative to substitute the tube design temperature for Ttm.

(Tc'):Themetal temperature of the channel at the tubesheet as expected during the case underconsideration (e.g., Operating, Startup, Shutdown, etc). It is generally not conservative to substitutethe channel design temperature for Tc'. This value is only required for radial differential thermalexpansion calculations.

(T'):Themetal temperature of the tubesheet at the rim as expected during the case underconsideration (e.g., Operating, Startup, Shutdown, etc). It is usually not conservative to substitutethe tubesheet design temperature for T'.

Stress:Thematerial allowable stress. When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specified in the vessel screen, thisvalue comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value is calculated based onthe ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value is limited to the valueslisted in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases. In caseswhere thetemperature exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s stress line, the value will bezero. Shell Stress and Shell Band Stress are based on Ts. Tube Stress is based on Tt. Tube Stress@ Tts is based on Tts. Stationary Channel Stress and Floating Channel Stress are based on Tc.Tubesheet Stress is based on Tts.

Yield:Thematerial yield strength based on Section II, Part D, Table Y-1. In caseswhere thetemperature exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s yield line, the value will bezero. There are several materials that do not have clear matches in these tables. When a clearmatch cannot be found by the software’s assignment criteria, the software will calculate the yieldstrength using the external pressure chart and themethod described in UG-28(c)(2) Step 3. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials. If nomatch is found and the software cannot perform thedescribed calculation, this value will be zero. Shell Yield and Shell Band Yield are based on Ts. TubeYield is based on Tt. Tube Yield@ Tts is based on Tts. Stationary Channel Yield and FloatingChannel Yield are based on Tc. Tubesheet Yield is based on Tts.

112 | Page

Page 125: Design Calc s Manual

Tubesheet (Fixed, Floating, and U-Tube)

Modulus:Thematerial modulus of elasticity based on the TM tables fromSection II, Part D. Thevalue shown here is based on the applicable TM table. In caseswhere the temperature exceeds thehighest temperature entry for thismaterial’s TM table, the value will be zero. There are severalmaterials that do not have clear matches in these tables. When a clear match cannot be found by thesoftware’s assignment criteria, the software will instead retrieve themodulus of elasticity from theexternal pressure chart assigned to thematerial. If this attempt also fails, then the value will be zero.This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials. Shell Modulus and Shell BandModulus are basedon Ts. TubeModulus is based on Tt. TubeModulus@ Tts is based on Tts. Stationary ChannelModulus and Floating Channel Modulus are based on Tc. Tubesheet Modulus is based on Tts.

Alpha:Thematerial mean coefficient of thermal expansion based on the TE tables fromSection II,Part D; column B is used in those tables. There are several materials that do not have clear matchesin these tables. When a clear match cannot be found by the software’s assignment criteria, this valuewill be zero. Shell Alpha s,m and Shell Band Alpha s,m1 are based on Tsm. Shell Alpha s’ is basedon Ts’. Tube Alpha s,m is based on Ttm. Stationary Channel Alpha C’ and Floating Channel AlphaC’ are based on Tc’. Tubesheet Alpha’ is based on T’.

Tube/TS Joints

Calculate Welds Using:Select the desired weld design equations. To consider the expanded tubelength in lending strength at the joint, select Appendix A.

Joint Type:Only applicable to Appendix A joints; see Appendix A for more information.

Weld Configuration:Select the weld configuration. For Appendix A calculations, the options in thisfield are dependent upon the type of joint selected.

Weld Type:Select whether the weld is Full Strength, Partial Strength, or Seal. This only applies tocalculations per UW-20.

Fillet Leg:The length of the fillet weld leg.

Design Strength:Applies to UW-20 partial strength welds. This value will be compared with the axialtube strength (Ft) and the lower value will be used in the calculations.

113 | Page

Page 126: Design Calc s Manual

Tubesheet (Fixed, Floating, and U-Tube)

Groove Leg:The length of the groove weld leg

Use qualification test efficiency:Select whether or not to use the qualification test efficiency. Thisonly applies to Appendix A joints.

Joint Efficiency Factor:Reduces the strength of the joint for the calculations. See Table A-2 for moreinformation.

MDMT

Perform MDMT Calculations

Perform UCS-66 calculations: Selecting this check boxwill cause the software to performUCS-66toughness calculations on the component. This option is only available tomaterials that are classifiedasUCSmaterials per Table UCS-23.

Exemption Drop-down:WhenUCS-66 calculationswill not be performed (the software will not allowthese calculationswhen a non-UCSmaterial is used), an exemptionmust be entered. Theexemptionmay be typed in or selected from the drop-down options, but the user is responsible forensuring that the exemption selected is valid for thematerial, service, etc., in question.

Efficient Tubesheet Creation Tips

If possible, design all heat exchanger components before adding the tubesheet. This will allow thesecomponents to be brought in to the tubesheet during the design process. This will increase theaccuracy of the information and the speed of creation.

Make sure the values for Tsm and Ttm are as accurate as possible. Though inflating values isconsideredmore conservative for design temperatures, this is not the case with Tsm and Ttm. Thedifference between the Tsm and Ttm values is important. The bigger the difference, the higher theload, so it ismore conservative to estimate a larger difference.

Enter the tubesheet thickness you believe is accurate. Click the status button and review theinformation. If the tubesheet is failing, review the guide on Troubleshooting tubesheets.

114 | Page

Page 127: Design Calc s Manual

Tubesheet (Fixed, Floating, and U-Tube)

Tubesheet Troubleshooting

Tubesheets per Part UHX requiremanymore inputs and calculations thanmost components inASME Section VIII-I. Because of this, it is very important that all of the dimensions, temperatures,materials, thermal values, etc., are entered correctly. Once this has been done, it is still possible thatthe design will be failing, incomplete, or passing with an unreasonable thickness. Due to the complexnature of the tubesheet design, this is very likely to occur. In order to finalize the tubesheet design,you can follow the suggestions below to aid in optimizing the tubesheet.

Incomplete Tubesheet

If the tubesheet is Incomplete, click the Check Status icon. This will give you amessage telling youwhy the design is incomplete. If themessage indicates that one or more values is unacceptable,check the tabs tomake sure the appropriate valueswere entered for every field. A second possibilityis that theMDMT calculations are checked on theMDMT tab but anMDMT loading condition row isnot present on the Conditions tab.

Failed Tubesheet

If the tubesheet is Failed, click the Check Status icon. If themessage indicates that the value of"mu*" exceeds 0.6 or that it is less than 0.1, amore fundamental design changemust occur to meetUHX. Review the section in UHX on tubesheet effective properties for triangular or square tubepatterns (whichever pattern you selected) if this is the case.

If the value of "mu*" is not the issue, review the different failuremodes present andmake sure that avalue NAN does not appear in themessage. This is a case that may occur in fixed and floatingtubesheet configuration "a" designswhere certain thermal values are identical. To remedy this,make sure that the thermal values entered are accurate for the operating conditions for each thermalloading case. Another reason thismay occur is if cumulative corrosion allowances are greater thanthe plate thickness. This type of failure is typically very easy to resolve by altering the inputs.

If neither the "mu*" or NAN issue is present in the information window, view the different failuremodes to decide the best approach to resolve the failing status.

115 | Page

Page 128: Design Calc s Manual

Tubesheet (Fixed, Floating, and U-Tube)

Design failing due to sigmatmax

or sigmatmin

If the design if failing due to sigmatmax, the design is failing due to the tensile stress in the tubes.This case is themost difficult to adjust.

1. Make sure that all of the tube information is entered correctly (especially the values for the thermalloading cases).

2. Ensure that the corrosion values are accurate for the tubes if a corrosion allowance was selected.

3. Check that the vacuum design pressure for the tube side entered on the Tube tab is the vacuumpressure in the channel and not the external pressure on the tubes.

If all of these items are correct and the tubes are still failing, amore aggressive change is needed,such as adding an expansion joint, increasing the tube gauge, or changing the tubematerial. Beforeperforming these changes, address the other failuremodes to limit the need tomake furtherchanges to the tube bundle and to help optimize the expansion joint design if one is required.

If the design is failing due to sigmatmin, the design is failing due to the critical buckling stress inthe tubes.

1. Follow the steps listed above for tubes failing due to tensile stress.

2. If the design is still failing for any loading case, look at the length of the unsupported spans and see ifthey can be reduced by adding tube supports. If tube supports are present, make sure the longestunsupported span is between a tubesheet and a tube support, not between two tube supports.

3. If the tubes are failing in the thermal loading cases, you also have the option to use thematerialproperties for loading cases at operating conditions. These values can be adjusted by changing thetemperatures on the conditions grid or manually altering the properties on the grid.

If these items have all been addressed and the tubes are still failing, amore aggressive approach,such as that described above for tubes failing due to tensile stress, will need to be taken.

116 | Page

Page 129: Design Calc s Manual

Tubesheet (Fixed, Floating, and U-Tube)

Design failing due to sigma S or sigma C

If the design is failing due to sigma S, the design is failing due to the stress in the shell integralwith the tubesheet. If it is failing in any of the loading cases, increasing the shell thickness is themosteffective way of reducing this stress. However, this solutionmay not be acceptable because ofgeometric constraints with the tube bundle, the necessity for an unavailable plate size, or cost. If theshell is failing in the design stress cases, the option to implement elastic plastic calculations (U-Tubeand Fixed only) is available. See the requirements for elastic plastic analysis in UHX to determine ifthis is acceptable in your engineering judgment. It may be necessary for the shell to satisfy therequirements of UG-23(e) in order to allow two times Yield for the SPS,s value to qualify for theelastic plastic calculations.

If the shell is failing in the thermal cases, several options exist. If the requirements of UG-23(e) aremet, it may be beneficial to change the SPS,s value to two times Yield to increase the allowableprimary plus secondary stress beyond that of three times Stress. You also have the option to use thematerial properties for loading cases at operating conditions. These values can be adjusted bychanging the temperatures on the conditions grid or manually altering the properties on the grid.

If the design is failing due to sigma C, the design is failing due to the stress in the channelintegral with the tubesheet. If it is failing in any of the loading cases, increasing the channel thicknessis themost effective way of reducing this stress. However, this solutionmay not be acceptablebecause of geometric constraints with the tube hold pattern on the tubesheet bundle, the necessityfor an unavailable plate size, or cost. If the channel is failing in the design stress cases, the option toimplement elastic plastic calculations (U-Tube and Fixed only) is available. See the requirements forelastic plastic analysis in UHX to determine if this is acceptable in your engineering judgment. It maybe necessary for the channel to satisfy the requirements of UG-23(e) in order to allow two timesYield for the SPS,c value to qualify for the elastic plastic calculations.

If the channel is failing in the thermal cases, several options exist. If the requirements of UG-23(e)aremet, it may be beneficial to change the SPS,c value to two times Yield to increase the allowableprimary plus secondary stress beyond that of three times Stress. You also have the option to use thematerial properties for loading cases at operating conditions. These values can be adjusted bychanging the temperatures on the conditions grid or manually altering the properties on the grid.

117 | Page

Page 130: Design Calc s Manual

Tubesheet (Fixed, Floating, and U-Tube)

Design failing due to tube-to-tubesheet welds

There are several ways tomake these welds pass, but most are not practical. Typically, the best waytomake the tube-to-tubesheet welds pass is to redesign them. If this is not an option or if the weldseizes become unrealistic, the next step is to carefully review the thermal cases for the tubesheetdesign. You also have the option to use thematerial properties for loading cases at operatingconditions. . These values can be adjusted by changing the temperatures on the conditions grid ormanually altering the properties on the grid.

118 | Page

Page 131: Design Calc s Manual

119 | Page

THIN WALL EXPANSION JOINT (return to Contents)

General Info 119

Bellows 120

Convolution/Collar 123

Shell 126

Displacement/MDMT 127

Conditions 129

General Info

Description:The label given for the component.

Mark: A shorthand reference for the component. It will also appear in the component report. Thedefault entry will be an abbreviation of the component type and the component number. Forexample, the second jacket shell for the vessel will start with amark SJ2.

Prompt before updating fields on conditions tab:Select this box to be asked to confirm changes tothe grid on the Conditions tab (See page 129); each time a field that affects the grid data is adjusted, amessage will appear prompting the user to accept or cancel the changes. Declining the changes tothe grid data does not affect the changesmade to the field. Clear this box to automatically update theConditions grid without confirming each change.

Configuration:Select the expansion joint configuration.\

The Expansion Joint has a Collar:Select the box if there is a collar. This will enable various fields onthe Convolution/Collar tab (See page 123).

Page 132: Design Calc s Manual

ThinWall Expansion Joint

Reinforcing Ring has a Fastener: Select this box if the reinforcement for Reinforced U-ShapedBellows is assembled by fasteners. Clear the box if the reinforcement is continuous.

Shaping Method:Select whether the bellows are As Formed or Annealed, Formed to 100% (basedon Db) or Formed to 50% (based on Dm), and whether ExpandingMandrel, Roll Forming (topoption) or Hydraulic, Elastometric, or Pneumatic tube forming (bottom option) was used. Thesecond and third choice only apply to U-shaped bellows (unreinforced and reinforced) and codeyears 2013 or later. These default based on common practice or what is conservative.

Bellows Attachment: This only applies to toroidal bellows, years 2013 and later. See Figure 26-1-2for more information. It defaults to Externally Attached.

Bellows

Bellows Information

Pressure:The internal design pressure (pressure on the concave side). This value is gaugepressure. When “Solve for Thickness” is selected, this value is an input and should not include statichead.When “Solve for Pressure” is selected, this value is a result. In the latter case, it represents thetotal internal pressure (design pressure plus head) that the component can handle andmeet code inthe absence of any other loadings.

Temperature:Themaximummeanmetal design temperature for the internal pressure case asdefined in UG-20(a).

Inside Diameter:The inside diameter of bellows convolutions and end tangents.

End Tangent Length:This field is only available for U-Shaped and reinforced U-Shaped Bellows.

Design Life Cycles: The specified number of fatigue cycles.

Fatigue Strength Reduction Factor:This value can range from 1.0 to 4.0 where 1.0 ismore favorablefor design. For more information, see the fatigue evaluation sections of Appendix 26 for the specifiedexpansion joint configuration.

120 | Page

Page 133: Design Calc s Manual

ThinWall Expansion Joint

Ply Thickness:Nominal thickness of one ply.

Number of Plies:This value can range from 1 to 5.

Mean Radius:Themean radius of a U-shaped convolution.

Dis. Attach. Weld to 1st Convolution:The length from the attachment weld to the center of the firstconvolution for externally attached bellows. This only applies to reinforced U-shaped and toroidalbellows.

Dist. Between Bellows Attach. Welds:The distance between toroidal bellows attachment welds ateach end of the bellows.

Max Distance Across Inside Opening:See Figure 26-1-1 sketch (c) for more information. Thismaximumdistance should consider all movements. This input only applies to toroidal bellows.

Bellows Material

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

121 | Page

Page 134: Design Calc s Manual

ThinWall Expansion Joint

Hot Modulus of Elasticity:Thematerial modulus of elasticity based on the TM tables fromSection II,Part D. The value shown here is based on the applicable TM table and the design temperature listedfor the internal pressure condition. In caseswhere the temperature listed for the internal pressurecondition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s TM table, the value will be zero.There are several materials that do not have clear matches in these tables. When a clear matchcannot be found by the software’s assignment criteria, the software will instead retrieve themodulusof elasticity from the external pressure chart assigned to thematerial. If this attempt also fails, thenthe value will be zero. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials. Manually editing this field willsever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Allowable Stress:Thematerial allowable stress at the temperature listed for the internal pressurecondition. When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSectionII, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 forBolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength fromTable U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowablestress tables for yield and creep governed cases. In caseswhere the temperature listed for theinternal pressure condition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s stress line, thevalue will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the software that the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and the connection to thematerial in thedatabase will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Hot Yield:Thematerial yield strength at the temperature listed for the internal pressure condition.This value comes fromSection II, Part D, Table Y-1. In caseswhere the temperature listed for theinternal pressure condition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s yield line, thevalue will be zero. There are several materials that do not have clear matches in these tables. Whena clear match cannot be found by the software’s assignment criteria, the software will calculate theyield strength using the external pressure chart and themethod described in UG-28(c)(2) Step 3.This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials. If nomatch is found and the software cannotperform the described calculation, this value will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform thesoftware that the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and theconnection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial”caption.

122 | Page

Page 135: Design Calc s Manual

ThinWall Expansion Joint

Cold Modulus of Elasticity: Thematerial modulus of elasticity at 70 °F (20 °C) based on the TMtables fromSection II, Part D.There are several materials that do not have clear matches in thesetables. When a clear match cannot be found by the software’s assignment criteria, the software willinstead retrieve themodulus of elasticity from the external pressure chart assigned to thematerial. Ifthis attempt also fails, then the value will be zero. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Poisson:Poisson's ratio for the selectedmaterial

Material Type: There are three options here, Austenitic Stainless Steel, Nickel Alloy, andOther.These affect the calculation of Ysm for U-shaped bellows (both Unreinforced and Reinforced) forcode years 2013 and later. This defaults to “Nickel Alloy” and needs to be updatedmanually despiteamaterial selection.

Convolution/Collar

Convolution Information

Number of Convolutions:Enter the number of convolutions in the expansion joint.

Convolution Height: This ismeasured in the neutral position from the valley of the convolution to thepeak on the same side of the bellows thickness.

Convolution Pitch:The center to center distance between adjacent convolutions. If the convolutionsshow an off-set angle of the sidewalls in the neutral position, the convolution pitch is the lengthbetween two consecutive convolutionswhen their sidewalls have beenmade parallel.

Convolution Root Radius:See Figure 26-2 for more information.

Convolution Crest Radius:See Figure 26-2 for more information.

123 | Page

Page 136: Design Calc s Manual

ThinWall Expansion Joint

Mean Dia. of Bellows Convolutions:For toroidal bellows, this value ismanually entered by the user;for all other bellows types, this value is calculated. For toroidal bellows, see Figure 26-1(c) for moreinformation.

Collar Information

Length: Bellows collar length.

Long Weld Jt. Eff.: The longitudinal weld joint efficiency for the tangent collar. This is determinedfrom Table UW-12.

Thickness:Bellows collar thickness.

Cross Sect. area of all reinf. collars:The cross sectional metal area of all reinforcing collars fortoroidal bellows.

Expansion Joint has Reinforcing Collar: Check the box to add a reinforcing collar to a toroidalbellows. Applies to years 2013 and later.

Reinforcing Collar Thickness:This applies to toroidal bellows, years 2013 and later. See Figure 26-1-1 sketch (c) for more information.

Reinforcing Collar Diameter:This applies to toroidal bellows, years 2013 and later. See Figure 26-1-1 sketch (c) for more information.

Reinforcing Collar Overall Length:This applies to toroidal bellows, years 2013 and later. See Figure26-1-1 sketch (c) for more information.

Long. Weld Jt. Eff. Reinforcing:This is the longitudinal weld joint efficiency for a reinforcing collar ona toroidal bellows.

Collar Material

The collar material and reinforcing collar material both appear in this section.

124 | Page

Page 137: Design Calc s Manual

ThinWall Expansion Joint

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

Hot Modulus of Elasticity:Thematerial modulus of elasticity based on the TM tables fromSection II,Part D. The value shown here is based on the applicable TM table and the design temperature listedfor the internal pressure condition. In caseswhere the temperature listed for the internal pressurecondition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s TM table, the value will be zero.There are several materials that do not have clear matches in these tables. When a clear matchcannot be found by the software’s assignment criteria, the software will instead retrieve themodulusof elasticity from the external pressure chart assigned to thematerial. If this attempt also fails, thenthe value will be zero. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials. Manually editing this field willsever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

125 | Page

Page 138: Design Calc s Manual

ThinWall Expansion Joint

Allowable Stress:Thematerial allowable stress at the temperature listed for the internal pressurecondition. When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSectionII, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 forBolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength fromTable U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowablestress tables for yield and creep governed cases. In caseswhere the temperature listed for theinternal pressure condition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s stress line, thevalue will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the software that the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and the connection to thematerial in thedatabase will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Shell

Shell Information

Thickness:This applies to Toroidal Bellows, years 2013 and later, that are attached inside the shell.See Figure 26-1-1 sketch (c) for more information.

Shell Diameter:This applies to Toroidal Bellows, years 2013 and later, that are attached inside theshell. See Figure 26-1-1 sketch (c) for more information. This is the inside diameter. If the shell issubject to corrosion, please enter the dimensions in the corroded condition.

Long. Weld Jt. Eff. Shell:This applies to Toroidal Bellows, years 2013 and later, that are attachedinside the shell. See Figure 26-1-1 sketch (c) for more information.

Shell Material

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

126 | Page

Page 139: Design Calc s Manual

ThinWall Expansion Joint

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Modulus of Elasticity:Thematerial modulus of elasticity based on the TM tables fromSection II, PartD. The value shown here is based on the applicable TM table and the design temperature listed forthe internal pressure condition. In caseswhere the temperature listed for the internal pressurecondition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s TM table, the value will be zero.There are several materials that do not have clear matches in these tables. When a clear matchcannot be found by the software’s assignment criteria, the software will instead retrieve themodulusof elasticity from the external pressure chart assigned to thematerial. If this attempt also fails, thenthe value will be zero. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials. Manually editing this field willsever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Allowable Stress:Thematerial allowable stress at the temperature listed for the internal pressurecondition. When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSectionII, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 forBolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength fromTable U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowablestress tables for yield and creep governed cases. In caseswhere the temperature listed for theinternal pressure condition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s stress line, thevalue will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the software that the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and the connection to thematerial in thedatabase will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Displacement/MDMT

Displacement Information

Initial Position Axial Displacement: Enter the initial position as compared to the neutral position atdesign conditions. If the initial position is the neutral position, enter zero. This valuemay be positiveor negative.

127 | Page

Page 140: Design Calc s Manual

ThinWall Expansion Joint

Final Position Axial Displacement:Enter the final position as compared to the neutral position atdesign conditions. If the final position is the neutral position, enter zero. This valuemay be positive ornegative.

Initial Position Lateral Displacement: Enter the initial position as compared to the neutral position atdesign conditions. If the initial position is the neutral position, enter zero. This valuemust be positive.

Final Position Lateral Displacement: Enter the final position as compared to the neutral position atdesign conditions. If the final position is the neutral position, enter zero. This valuemust be positive

Initial Position Angular Rotation:Enter the initial position as compared to the neutral position atdesign conditions. If the initial position is the neutral position, enter zero. This value is entered asdegrees but will be converted to radians in themathematics to be consistent with Appendix 26calculations.

Final Position Angular Rotation: Enter the final position as compared to the neutral position atdesign conditions. If the final position is the neutral position, enter zero. This value is entered asdegrees but will be converted to radians in themathematics to be consistent with Appendix 26calculations.

Perform MDMT Calculations

Perform UCS-66 calculations: Selecting this check boxwill cause the software to performUCS-66toughness calculations on the component. This option is only available tomaterials that are classifiedasUCSmaterials per Table UCS-23.

Exemption Drop-down:WhenUCS-66 calculationswill not be performed (the software will not allowthese calculationswhen a non-UCSmaterial is used), an exemptionmust be entered. Theexemptionmay be typed in or selected from the drop-down options, but the user is responsible forensuring that the exemption selected is valid for thematerial, service, etc., in question.

MDMT

Apply UCS-68(c):Selecting this check boxwill give an additional flat reduction in the allowedMDMTper UCS-68(c). Carefully review this paragraph as there are steep requirements for this exemption.

128 | Page

Page 141: Design Calc s Manual

ThinWall Expansion Joint

MDMT Curve:The notes in Figure UCS-66 provide the criteria to assign theMDMT curve to thematerial and product form of the component. Curve A will give the least favorable allowedMDMTandCurve D will give themost favorable allowedMDMT.WhenUCSmaterials do not have a clearmatch using the criteria, they are assigned a conservative value of A. As the software cannotcurrently obtain possible improvements in curve rating due to heat treatment and other factors, theuser may override the curve value.

Conditions

The conditions grid is a repository for thin walled expansion joint design cases. Values entered herewill overrule values entered on previous tabs. For example, if internal pressure on this tab is 200 PSIbut it is 50 PSI on the bellows tab, 200 PSI will be used in the calculations.

The data in the conditions grid will update with changes from the other tabs if the user selects Yeswhen asked or if "Prompt before updating fields on conditions tab" is not selected (See page 119).However, a value entered on the conditions grid will not change the value on any other tab.

Grid Navigation

Previous Record

Next Record

Insert a New Record

Edit the Current Record

Delete the Current Record

129 | Page

Page 142: Design Calc s Manual

130 | Page

THICK WALL EXPANSION JOINT (return to Contents)

General Info 130

Design Info 131

Operating Info 134

Shell/Tube Info 136

MDMT/Other 139

Thick Walled Expansion Joint Methodology 140

General Info

Description:The label given for the component.

Mark: A shorthand reference for the component. It will also appear in the component report. Thedefault entry will be an abbreviation of the component type and the component number. Forexample, the second jacket shell for the vessel will start with amark SJ2.

Number of Joints: Enter the number of convolutions.

Configuration:Select the joint configuration.

Page 143: Design Calc s Manual

Thick Wall Expansion Joint

Design Info

Design Info

Pressure:The internal design pressure (pressure on the concave side). This value is gaugepressure. When “Solve for Thickness” is selected, this value is an input and should not include statichead.When “Solve for Pressure” is selected, this value is a result. In the latter case, it represents thetotal internal pressure (design pressure plus head) that the component can handle andmeet code inthe absence of any other loadings.

Temperature:Themaximummeanmetal design temperature for the internal pressure case asdefined in UG-20(a).

CA:Corrosion allowance on the inside of the component (concave side).

Thin Out:Thematerial thickness lost to the forming process. To determine theminimum thicknessafter forming, the un-corroded nominal thickness is reduced by this amount.

Circ. Joint Efficiency:The joint efficiency of the circumferential joints (girth seams) in the expansionjoint. This is determined from Table UW-12 for welded joints. Thismay also representcircumferential ligament efficiency per UG-53.When both ligaments and welded joints exist, thelowest efficiency is used. See Appendix L for further help in determining the efficiency.

Long. Joint Efficiency:The joint efficiency of the longitudinal joints (long seams) in the expansionjoint. This is determined from Table UW-12 for welded joints. Thismay also represent longitudinalligament efficiency per UG-53.When both ligaments and welded joints exist, the lowest efficiency isused. See Appendix L for further help in determining the efficiency.

131 | Page

Page 144: Design Calc s Manual

Thick Wall Expansion Joint

Nominal Thickness:This value is in the new condition. For the component to pass, this valuemust beat least the sum of the thickness necessary for pressure and temperature, corrosion allowances, andforming allowances or under-tolerances. If the thickness necessary for pressure and temperature isless than the thickness required byUG-16, the nominal thicknessmust be at least the sum of theUG-16 thickness and the tolerances, etc. In some cases, under-tolerance is not considered (e.g., fornozzle reinforcement, the under-tolerance of the nozzle neck is ignored). When “Solve forThickness” is selected, the software will determine the smallest standard size that passes. The useris able tomanually edit this value.

Inner Torus: The inside radius of the inside straight flange or shell.

Inner Torus Knuckle Radius:The radius of the inner torus knuckle.

Outer Torus:The inside radius of the outside straight flange.

Outer Torus Knuckle Radius:The radius of the outer torus knuckle.

Inner Straight Flange Length:Enter the length of the inner straight flange.

Inside Width:The inside width of the expansion joint.

Use Operating temperature for calculations when allowed:Select this box to enable the OperatingInfo tab (See page 134).

Expansion Joint Material

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

132 | Page

Page 145: Design Calc s Manual

Thick Wall Expansion Joint

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Modulus of Elasticity:Thematerial modulus of elasticity based on the TM tables fromSection II, PartD. The value shown here is based on the applicable TM table and the design temperature listed forthe internal pressure condition. In caseswhere the temperature listed for the internal pressurecondition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s TM table, the value will be zero.There are several materials that do not have clear matches in these tables. When a clear matchcannot be found by the software’s assignment criteria, the software will instead retrieve themodulusof elasticity from the external pressure chart assigned to thematerial. If this attempt also fails, thenthe value will be zero. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials. Manually editing this field willsever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Hot Stress:Thematerial allowable stress at the temperature listed for the internal pressurecondition. When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSectionII, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 forBolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength fromTable U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowablestress tables for yield and creep governed cases. In caseswhere the temperature listed for theinternal pressure condition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s stress line, thevalue will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the software that the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and the connection to thematerial in thedatabase will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Cold Stress:Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specified inthe vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value iscalculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value islimited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

133 | Page

Page 146: Design Calc s Manual

Thick Wall Expansion Joint

Yield:Thematerial yield strength at the temperature listed for the internal pressure condition. Thisvalue comes fromSection II, Part D, Table Y-1. In caseswhere the temperature listed for theinternal pressure condition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s yield line, thevalue will be zero. There are several materials that do not have clear matches in these tables. Whena clear match cannot be found by the software’s assignment criteria, the software will calculate theyield strength using the external pressure chart and themethod described in UG-28(c)(2) Step 3.This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials. If nomatch is found and the software cannotperform the described calculation, this value will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform thesoftware that the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and theconnection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial”caption.

Poisson:Poisson's ratio for the selectedmaterial

Operating Info

Use Operating Temperature for Thermal Cases:Select this box to determine the expansion jointmaterial properties from the operating temperature for the thermal cases. Clear this box to use thedesign temperature.

Use Operating Temperature for Fatigue Cases:Select this box to determine the expansion jointmaterial properties from the operating temperature for the fatigue cases. Clear this box to use thedesign temperature.

Operating Temperature:The temperature expected during operation.

Expansion Joint Material

Material/Condition:Thematerial is selected on the Design Info tab (See page 131).

134 | Page

Page 147: Design Calc s Manual

Thick Wall Expansion Joint

Modulus of Elasticity:Thematerial modulus of elasticity based on the TM tables fromSection II, PartD. The value shown here is based on the applicable TM table and the design temperature listed forthe internal pressure condition. In caseswhere the temperature listed for the internal pressurecondition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s TM table, the value will be zero.There are several materials that do not have clear matches in these tables. When a clear matchcannot be found by the software’s assignment criteria, the software will instead retrieve themodulusof elasticity from the external pressure chart assigned to thematerial. If this attempt also fails, thenthe value will be zero. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials. Manually editing this field willsever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Operating Stress:Thematerial allowable stress at the operating temperature. When a 3.5:1 safetyfactor is specified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A forFerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factoris specified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D;furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creepgoverned cases. In caseswhere the operating temperature exceeds the highest temperature entryfor thismaterial’s stress line, the value will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the softwarethat the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and theconnection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial”caption. 

Ambient Stress:Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor isspecified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor isspecified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D;furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creepgoverned cases. Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the databaseas indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

135 | Page

Page 148: Design Calc s Manual

Thick Wall Expansion Joint

Yield:Thematerial yield strength at the operating temperature. This value comes fromSection II,Part D, Table Y-1. In caseswhere the operating temperature exceeds the highest temperature entryfor thismaterial’s yield line, the value will be zero. There are several materials that do not have clearmatches in these tables. When a clear match cannot be found by the software’s assignment criteria,the software will calculate the yield strength using the external pressure chart and themethoddescribed in UG-28(c)(2) Step 3. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials. If nomatch isfound and the software cannot perform the described calculation, this value will be zero. Manuallyediting this field will inform the software that the user is defining thematerial differently than what isstored in the database and the connection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This isindicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Shell/Tube Info

Shell Information

Description:The label given for the component.

Thickness:This value is in the new condition. For the component to pass, this valuemust be at leastthe sum of the thickness necessary for pressure and temperature, corrosion allowances, andforming allowances or under-tolerances. If the thickness necessary for pressure and temperature isless than the thickness required byUG-16, the nominal thicknessmust be at least the sum of theUG-16 thickness and the tolerances, etc. In some cases, under-tolerance is not considered (e.g., fornozzle reinforcement, the under-tolerance of the nozzle neck is ignored). When “Solve forThickness” is selected, the software will determine the smallest standard size that passes. The useris able tomanually edit this value.

Corrosion Allowance:Corrosion allowance on the inside of the component (concave side).

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

136 | Page

Page 149: Design Calc s Manual

Thick Wall Expansion Joint

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

(Tsm):Themean shell temperature along the shell length as expected during operation. It isgenerally not conservative to substitute the shell design temperature for Tsm.

Ambient Temp.:The ambient temperature.

Alpha s,m:Themean coefficient of thermal expansion of the shell material at themean shelltemperature along the shell length (Ts,m). Themean coefficient of thermal expansion based on theTE tables fromSection II, Part D; column B is used in those tables. There are several materials thatdo not have clear matches in these tables. When a clear match cannot be found by the software’sassignment criteria, this value will be zero. Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Consider Effect of Different shell material/thickness adjacent to tubesheet:Select this box if the shellhas a different thickness or material adjacent to the tubesheet; this is the same as using a shell band.Selecting this boxwill enable the Shell Band fields.

Shell Band Information

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

137 | Page

Page 150: Design Calc s Manual

Thick Wall Expansion Joint

Alpha s,m,1:Themean coefficient of thermal expansion of the shell material at themean shelltemperature along the shell length (Ts,m). Themean coefficient of thermal expansion based on theTE tables fromSection II, Part D; column B is used in those tables. There are several materials thatdo not have clear matches in these tables. When a clear match cannot be found by the software’sassignment criteria, this value will be zero. Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

L1, L1': Length of shell thickness adjacent to the tubesheets.

Tube Information

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Length:The total length of tubes. The user may substitute the length of tubes between tubesheetswhich is consistent with part UHX. Using the total length of tubeswill result in higher differentialmovement.

Ttm:Themean tube temperature along the tube length as expected during operation; this considersthe entire tube bundle. It is generally not conservative to substitute the tube design temperature forTtm.

138 | Page

Page 151: Design Calc s Manual

Thick Wall Expansion Joint

Alpha t,m:Themean coefficient of thermal expansion of the tubematerial at themean temperaturealong the tube length (Tt,m). Themean coefficient of thermal expansion based on the TE tables fromSection II, Part D; column B is used in those tables. There are several materials that do not haveclear matches in these tables. When a clear match cannot be found by the software’s assignmentcriteria, this value will be zero. Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial inthe database as indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

MDMT/Other

Perform MDMT Calculations

Perform UCS-66 calculations: Selecting this check boxwill cause the software to performUCS-66toughness calculations on the component. This option is only available tomaterials that are classifiedasUCSmaterials per Table UCS-23.

Exemption Drop-down:WhenUCS-66 calculationswill not be performed (the software will not allowthese calculationswhen a non-UCSmaterial is used), an exemptionmust be entered. Theexemptionmay be typed in or selected from the drop-down options, but the user is responsible forensuring that the exemption selected is valid for thematerial, service, etc., in question.

MDMT

Apply UCS-68(c):Selecting this check boxwill give an additional flat reduction in the allowedMDMTper UCS-68(c). Carefully review this paragraph as there are steep requirements for this exemption.

MDMT Curve:The notes in Figure UCS-66 provide the criteria to assign theMDMT curve to thematerial and product form of the component. Curve A will give the least favorable allowedMDMTandCurve D will give themost favorable allowedMDMT.WhenUCSmaterials do not have a clearmatch using the criteria, they are assigned a conservative value of A. As the software cannotcurrently obtain possible improvements in curve rating due to heat treatment and other factors, theuser may override the curve value.

MDMT Pressure:The net internal pressure (concave side) on the component coincident with theminimumdesignmetal temperature (MDMT). This includes static head.

139 | Page

Page 152: Design Calc s Manual

Thick Wall Expansion Joint

Requirements

Per UG-23(e), calculate using:Select whether to calculate the allowable primary plus secondarystress using 3xS or 2xSy.Caution: If 3xS is selected and the value of S is determined at 90% of Sy,the allowable primary plus secondary stresswill be 2.7xSy.

Use High alloy steel minimum thickness requirements:Select this box to use theminimum thicknessrequirements for high alloy steel (0.125", 3mm).

Fatigue

Design Cycles:  Specify the number of design cycles for operation.

Fatigue Reduction Factor:The fatigue strength reduction factor is affected bymany variables,including sharp corners, surface roughness, etc. Expansion joints that include these items shouldreflect this with a higher value. Higher valueswill lower the allowable fatigue strength of the design.

Thick Walled Expansion Joint Methodology

This article providesmethodology for designing a thick walled expansion joint. The calculationsdeveloped here are based primarily on the paper “Expansion Joints for Heat Exchangers” (alsodiscussed in Design of Process Equipment) and the rules introduced in ASME Section VIII, DivisionI, 2001 Code, 2002 Addenda, Appendix 5.

Many of the symbols have been changed tomore clearly represent values based on pressure orthermal expansion. The calculation of the axial rigidity was not clearly provided by any of thereferences; the equation used here was derived from the Kopp and Sayremethod. The differentialexpansion per annular plate and the resultant axial rigidity were altered to consider multipleconvolutions. The total differential thermal expansion was taken from part UHX.

140 | Page

Page 153: Design Calc s Manual

Thick Wall Expansion Joint

Appendix 5 from the 2002 Addenda gives us some basis for determining cycle life. In 2003, the cyclelife calculationswere removed from the code bookbecause the code writers thought that enforcing the useof the specific equationswas unnecessary. Theallowable stress criteria fromSection VIII, Division IUG-23 is used, limitingmembrane + primary bendingstress to 1.5S andmembrane + secondary bending toSPS. The current Appendix 5 also has a shell stressrequirement on the straight flange sections if theyexceed a certain length; this requirement is checked aswell as other requirements on dimensions fromAppendix 5. The stress calculations come from thepaper mentioned above.

Additional Notes:

1. The user may use an operating temperature as well as a design temperature for the expansion joint.Expansion joint material properties and allowable stresses will be determined from the temperatureused for the loading case in question. The default for all calculations is to use design temperature.Even if the designer chooses to use operating temperature, there are calculations that still require theuse of design temperature. See notes 3 and 6.

2. All calculations are performed for both the new and the corroded condition.

3. The calculation for the axial rigidity will be based on the design temperature only.

4. For the purpose of determining the axial rigidity, the designer shall have the option to neglect the effectof the thinning allowance.

5. There are 6 loading cases; each loading case will have a new and a corroded condition for a total of 12cases. The 6 loading cases are: Pressure, Thermal, Pressure + Thermal, Pressure + Fatigue, Thermal+ Fatigue, and Pressure + Thermal + Fatigue.

6. The Pressure case is always performed using the design temperature.

7. The Thermal and Pressure + Thermal cases may be performed using the operating temperature at thedesigner’s discretion.

8. The determination of Sn and the pass/fail status for the loading cases that include Fatiguemay bebased on operating temperature at the designer’s discretion.

9. The value of SPS is either 3S or 2SY, per the designer’s discretion.

141 | Page

Page 154: Design Calc s Manual

142 | Page

JACKET CLOSURE (return to Contents)

General Info 142

Closure 142

General Info

Mark: A shorthand reference for the component. It will also appear in the component report. Thedefault entry will be an abbreviation of the component type and the component number. Forexample, the second jacket shell for the vessel will start with amark SJ2.

Description:The label given for the component. It will appear in the component pane, the reportdialog, the summary pane, and at the top of the component report. This will default to the componenttype and component number. For example, the third nozzle for the vessel will start with a descriptionof Nozzle 3.

Jacket Type:Select an option from the drop-down list. See Appendix 9 for more information.

Closure Type: Select an option from the drop-down list. See Appendix 9 for more information.

Closure

Inner Vessel

This section displays summary information on the inner vessel component that is connected to thejacket closure.

Jacket

This section displays summary information on the jacket component that is connected to the jacketclosure.

Page 155: Design Calc s Manual

Jacket Closure

Closure

Pressure:The internal design pressure (pressure on the concave side). This value is gaugepressure. When “Solve for Thickness” is selected, this value is an input and should not include statichead.When “Solve for Pressure” is selected, this value is a result. In the latter case, it represents thetotal internal pressure (design pressure plus head) that the component can handle andmeet code inthe absence of any other loadings.

Static Head:The internal pressure (pressure on the concave side) resulting from the static head ofthe fluid. The user must determine this value and input it accordingly. It will be added to the Pressureinput and the sumwill be used in the internal pressure calculations for the component. This field willnot be present when “Solve for Thickness” is selected.

Temperature:Themaximummeanmetal design temperature for the internal pressure case asdefined in UG-20(a).

CA:Corrosion allowance on the inside of the component (concave side).

Efficiency:The joint efficiency of the component, which is determined from Table UW-12 for weldedjoints andmay also represent ligament efficiency per UG-53.When both ligaments and welded jointsexist, the lowest efficiency is used. See Appendix L for further help in determining the efficiency.

Nominal (tc):This value is in the new condition. For the component to pass, this valuemust be atleast the sum of the thickness necessary for pressure and temperature, corrosion allowances, andforming allowances or under-tolerances. If the thickness necessary for pressure and temperature isless than the thickness required byUG-16, the nominal thicknessmust be at least the sum of theUG-16 thickness and the tolerances, etc. In some cases, under-tolerance is not considered (e.g., fornozzle reinforcement, the under-tolerance of the nozzle neck is ignored). When “Solve forThickness” is selected, the software will determine the smallest standard size that passes. ForJacket closures, this valuemust alsomeet certain detail requirements.

143 | Page

Page 156: Design Calc s Manual

Jacket Closure

Material

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

Stress (Hot):Thematerial allowable stress at the temperature listed for the internal pressurecondition. When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSectionII, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 forBolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength fromTable U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowablestress tables for yield and creep governed cases. In caseswhere the temperature listed for theinternal pressure condition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s stress line, thevalue will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the software that the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and the connection to thematerial in thedatabase will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

144 | Page

Page 157: Design Calc s Manual

Jacket Closure

Stress (Cold):Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specifiedin the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value iscalculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value islimited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Factor B table: The external pressure table assigned to thematerial in the allowable stress tables inSection II, Part D. The table is used to determine the external pressure strength of the componentand also the longitudinal compressive strength. Selecting a Factor B table other than the oneassigned to thematerial will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

145 | Page

Page 158: Design Calc s Manual

146 | Page

L IFT ING LUG (return to Contents)

General Information 146

Lug Information 149

Repad Information 153

General Information

Description:The label given for the component. It will appear in the component pane, the reportdialog, the summary pane, and at the top of the component report. This will default to the componenttype and component number. For example, the third nozzle for the vessel will start with a descriptionof Nozzle 3.

Mark: A shorthand reference for the component. It will also appear in the component report. Thedefault entry will be an abbreviation of the component type and the component number. Forexample, the second jacket shell for the vessel will start with amark SJ2.

Vessel Weight: When the lifting lug is created, this value will be automatically completed with thecalculated weight of the vessel at the time the lug was created. If components are added to thevessel after the creation of the lifting lug, this field will not update. The weight that is calculated herefor the initial creation of the lifting lug does not include anyweights or content listed in Vessel >Attachments/Loadings.

Vertical Lift Angle: The angle formed between the vertical and the direction the lift force is pulling(see the figure on theGeneral Information tab in the software for more information).

Impact Factor: A multiplier on the vessel weight to account for dynamics on the vessel during the lift.For example, if 5000 lb. is entered as the vessel weight and 1.5 is entered for the Impact Factor, theweight will be increased to 7500 lb. for the calculations.

Calculate Localized Stresses:Select this box to also check local stresses in the host shell.

Page 159: Design Calc s Manual

Lifting Lug

Support Types:Select a lifting lug type from the available options (see the figure for moreinformation). Types 1 and 2 are for horizontal vessels; types 3 and 4 are for vertical vessels.

Lug Location

Distance from Reference Line: The distance from the reference line datummeasured along the axisof the vessel to the top of the lug.

Calculate as a Pair:Enables entry of the "Distance fromReference Line" for both a right and a leftlug.

Lug Orientation: Determines the position of the lug around the shell.

Host Information

Description: Displays the description of the host as entered in the component's General Informationtab.

User Defined:Select this box tomanually adjust the host values. By default, these values areimported from the host component.

Temperature:Themaximummeanmetal design temperature for the internal pressure case asdefined in UG-20(a).

Thickness:This value is in the new condition. For the component to pass, this valuemust be at leastthe sum of the thickness necessary for pressure and temperature, corrosion allowances, andforming allowances or under-tolerances. If the thickness necessary for pressure and temperature isless than the thickness required byUG-16, the nominal thicknessmust be at least the sum of theUG-16 thickness and the tolerances, etc. In some cases, under-tolerance is not considered (e.g., fornozzle reinforcement, the under-tolerance of the nozzle neck is ignored). When “Solve forThickness” is selected, the software will determine the smallest standard size that passes. The useris able tomanually edit this value.

Radius:The component radius in the new condition.

147 | Page

Page 160: Design Calc s Manual

Lifting Lug

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

Modulus of Elasticity:Thematerial modulus of elasticity based on the TM tables fromSection II, PartD. The value shown here is based on the applicable TM table and the design temperature listed forthe internal pressure condition. In caseswhere the temperature listed for the internal pressurecondition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s TM table, the value will be zero.There are several materials that do not have clear matches in these tables. When a clear matchcannot be found by the software’s assignment criteria, the software will instead retrieve themodulusof elasticity from the external pressure chart assigned to thematerial. If this attempt also fails, thenthe value will be zero. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials. Manually editing this field willsever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

148 | Page

Page 161: Design Calc s Manual

Lifting Lug

Stress (Hot):Thematerial allowable stress at the temperature listed for the internal pressurecondition. When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSectionII, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 forBolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength fromTable U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowablestress tables for yield and creep governed cases. In caseswhere the temperature listed for theinternal pressure condition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s stress line, thevalue will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the software that the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and the connection to thematerial in thedatabase will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Stress (Cold):Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specifiedin the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value iscalculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value islimited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Yield Strength:Thematerial yield strength at the temperature listed for the internal pressurecondition. This value comes fromSection II, Part D, Table Y-1. In caseswhere the temperaturelisted for the internal pressure condition exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’syield line, the value will be zero. There are several materials that do not have clear matches in thesetables. When a clear match cannot be found by the software’s assignment criteria, the software willcalculate the yield strength using the external pressure chart and themethod described in UG-28(c)(2) Step 3. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials. If nomatch is found and the softwarecannot perform the described calculation, this value will be zero. Manually editing this field will informthe software that the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database andthe connection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Lug Information

Temperature:Themaximummeanmetal design temperature for the lug.

149 | Page

Page 162: Design Calc s Manual

Lifting Lug

Lug Width/Lug Length:The horizontal dimension (in vessel operating position) of the lug at its base.Lug Length is used for horizontal vessels and LugWidth is for vertical vessels.

Shackle Hole Diameter: Diameter of the hole where the lifting equipment will be attached to the lug.

Shackle Hole Centerline Height: Distance from the base of the lug to the center of the shackle hole.For Type 4 lifting lugs, this is the axial distance (see the figure on theGeneral Information tab in thesoftware for more information).

Lug Weld Leg:The fillet weld leg between the lug and the repad or the lug and the host.

Weld Joint Efficiency: Multiplier on the allowable stress of thematerials attached by the fillet weld. Alower value is consideredmore conservative and this value cannot exceed 1.0.

Weld Len. Omitted over head Weld: The length along opposite edges of the lifting lug where the weldstops and then restarts to avoid welding over the head to shell seam. This field is only available when3 or 4 is selected as the "Support Type."

Lug Thickness: The thickness of the lug.

Lug Radius: The radial distance from the center of the shackle hole to the outside edge of the liftinglug.

Lug Foot Height: Available when 2 or 4 is selected as the "Support Type," this is the dimension onthe lifting lug from the base to where the lug cross-section changes for Type 2 lugs and to where thelug is bent for Type 4 lugs. See the figure on theGeneral Information tab of the software for moreinformation.

Lug Angle:The angle at which the lug cross-section reduces, starting at the top of the lug foot height.This field is only available for Type 2 lugs.

Lug Weld Height: Themeasurement of the weld from its lowest point on the side of the lug to thehighest point. The total length of the welds on the sides of the lug is 2x the weld height minus 2x theomitted length.

150 | Page

Page 163: Design Calc s Manual

Lifting Lug

Add Weld Notch: Select this box to add a weld notch to the bottom of the lug. This will add a length ofweld equal to pi times the radius of the weld notch.

in. Radius of Weld Notch: The weld notch is assumed to be a half-circle of this radius and located inthe bottom-center of the lug.

Use Repad:Select this box to add a reinforcing pad between the lug and the host. This option is onlyavailable for lifting lugs on horizontal vessels (Types 1 and 2).

Lug Material

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

151 | Page

Page 164: Design Calc s Manual

Lifting Lug

Modulus of Elasticity:Thematerial modulus of elasticity based on the TM tables fromSection II, PartD. The value shown here is based on the applicable TM table and the design temperature listed forlug. In caseswhere the lug temperature listed exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s TM table, the value will be zero. There are several materials that do not have clearmatches in these tables. When a clear match cannot be found by the software’s assignment criteria,the software will instead retrieve themodulus of elasticity from the external pressure chart assignedto thematerial. If this attempt also fails, then the value will be zero. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials. Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the databaseas indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Stress (Hot):Thematerial allowable stress at the lug temperature. When a 3.5:1 safety factor isspecified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor isspecified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D;furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creepgoverned cases. In caseswhere the lug temperature exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s stress line, the value will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the software that theuser is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and the connection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Stress (Cold):Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specifiedin the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value iscalculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value islimited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

152 | Page

Page 165: Design Calc s Manual

Lifting Lug

Yield Strength:Thematerial yield strength at the lug temperature. This value comes fromSection II,Part D, Table Y-1. In caseswhere the lug temperature exceeds the highest temperature entry forthismaterial’s yield line, the value will be zero. There are several materials that do not have clearmatches in these tables. When a clear match cannot be found by the software’s assignment criteria,the software will calculate the yield strength using the external pressure chart and themethoddescribed in UG-28(c)(2) Step 3. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials. If nomatch isfound and the software cannot perform the described calculation, this value will be zero. Manuallyediting this field will inform the software that the user is defining thematerial differently than what isstored in the database and the connection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This isindicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Repad Information

Repad Design Information

Repad Height/Length:Enter the height/length of the reinforcing pad (measured along the length ofthe shell).

Repad Width:Enter the width of the reinforcing pad (measured around the girth of the shell).

Repad Weld Leg: The fillet weld leg between the repad and the host.

Repad Thickness:The thickness of the reinforcing pad.

Temperature:Themaximummeanmetal design temperature for the reinforcing pad.

Repad Material

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

153 | Page

Page 166: Design Calc s Manual

Lifting Lug

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

Modulus of Elasticity:Thematerial modulus of elasticity based on the TM tables fromSection II, PartD. The value shown here is based on the applicable TM table and the design temperature listed forthe repad. In caseswhere the listed temperature exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s TM table, the value will be zero. There are several materials that do not have clearmatches in these tables. When a clear match cannot be found by the software’s assignment criteria,the software will instead retrieve themodulus of elasticity from the external pressure chart assignedto thematerial. If this attempt also fails, then the value will be zero. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials. Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the databaseas indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Stress (Hot):Thematerial allowable stress at the repad temperature. When a 3.5:1 safety factor isspecified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor isspecified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D;furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creepgoverned cases. In caseswhere the repad temperature exceeds the highest temperature entry forthismaterial’s stress line, the value will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the softwarethat the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and theconnection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial”caption.

154 | Page

Page 167: Design Calc s Manual

Lifting Lug

Stress (Cold):Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specifiedin the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value iscalculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value islimited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Yield Strength:Thematerial yield strength at the repad temperature. This value comes fromSectionII, Part D, Table Y-1. In caseswhere the repad temperature exceeds the highest temperature entryfor thismaterial’s yield line, the value will be zero. There are several materials that do not have clearmatches in these tables. When a clear match cannot be found by the software’s assignment criteria,the software will calculate the yield strength using the external pressure chart and themethoddescribed in UG-28(c)(2) Step 3. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials. If nomatch isfound and the software cannot perform the described calculation, this value will be zero. Manuallyediting this field will inform the software that the user is defining thematerial differently than what isstored in the database and the connection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This isindicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

155 | Page

Page 168: Design Calc s Manual

156 | Page

SADDLE (return to Contents)

General Information 156

Wear Plate/Top Flange 157

Saddle Design 161

Base Plate/Anchor Bolt 163

Zick Stiffener 168

General Information

Description:The label given for the component. It will appear in the component pane, the reportdialog, the summary pane, and at the top of the component report. This will default to the componenttype and component number. For example, the third nozzle for the vessel will start with a descriptionof Nozzle 3.

Mark: A shorthand reference for the component. It will also appear in the component report. Thedefault entry will be an abbreviation of the component type and the component number. Forexample, the second jacket shell for the vessel will start with amark SJ2.

Elevation above grade: The distance from grade to the bottom of the base plate.

Vessel Centerline height: The distance from the bottom of the base plate to the longitudinal axis ofthe saddled shell.

Angle of contact of saddle with vessel:The central angle of contact between the outside stiffenerswith the vertex at the axis of the vessel. This value can be increased depending on top flange designsettings.

Page 169: Design Calc s Manual

Saddle

Distance from center line of saddle to tangent line:Enter the distance from the center of a saddle tothe nearest tangent line. This will always be a positive number.

Add Wear Plate:Select this box to add a wear plate to the saddle design.

Support Design Condition:Select the design condition of the shell. If the A/R ratio is less than orequal to 1/2 (A/R <= 1/2) and a stiffening ring is not added in the saddle design, the plane of thesaddle will consider the stiffening effect of the head. Stiffening ringsmay be considered regardless ofthe A/R ratio, however if a wear plate is to be used to reduce various stresses during the ZickAnalysis, a ring stiffener cannot be in the plane of the saddle. If A/R > ½ and there is not a stiffeningring added in the saddle design, the plane of the saddle will not be stiffened.

Top Flange Design:The presence of a saddle top flange and its function are decided here. Theoption to consider the top flange as a saddle element will allow the saddle stresses to consider theadded strength of a top flange, however it will not increase the angle of contact to the top flangeextension. Considering the top flange as a saddle extension will allow the saddle stresses toconsider the added strength of a top flange and will use the anglemeasured to the horn of the flangeas the angle of contact in the calculations instead of using the angle formed to the top of the outersaddle stiffeners. This will result in lower stresses.

Wear Plate/Top Flange

These fields will only be enabled if their respective components (wear plate and top flange) areselected on theGeneral Information tab (See page 156).

Wear Plate

Temperature:Themaximummeanmetal design temperature for the wear plate.

Thickness:Thewear plate thickness.

Width:Thewidth of the wear plate. The wear platemay be ineffective at reducing certain vesselstresses if this value is too small.

157 | Page

Page 170: Design Calc s Manual

Saddle

Extension: Enter the distance the wear plate extends beyond the outside of the saddle outerstiffeners. The wear platemay be ineffective at reducing certain vessel stresses if this value is toosmall.

Use Wear Plate for S2:Select the box to consider the wear plate in the tangential shear stresscalculations. The wear platemay be unable to reduce S2 if its dimensions are inadequate.

Use Wear Plate for S3:Select the box to consider the wear plate in the circumferential stresscalculations at the horn of the saddle. The wear platemay be unable to reduce S3 if its dimensionsare inadequate.

Use Wear plate for S5: Select the box to consider the wear plate in the calculations for the ringcompression stress in the shell over the saddle. The wear platemay be unable to reduce S5 if itsdimensions are inadequate.

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

158 | Page

Page 171: Design Calc s Manual

Saddle

Yield Strength:Thematerial yield strength at the wear plate temperature. This value comes fromSection II, Part D, Table Y-1. In caseswhere the wear plate temperature exceeds the highesttemperature entry for thismaterial’s yield line, the value will be zero. There are several materials thatdo not have clear matches in these tables. When a clear match cannot be found by the software’sassignment criteria, the software will calculate the yield strength using the external pressure chartand themethod described in UG-28(c)(2) Step 3. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials.If nomatch is found and the software cannot perform the described calculation, this value will bezero. Manually editing this field will inform the software that the user is defining thematerialdifferently than what is stored in the database and the connection to thematerial in the database willbe severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Stress (Hot):Thematerial allowable stress at the wear plate temperature. When a 3.5:1 safety factoris specified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor isspecified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D;furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creepgoverned cases. In caseswhere the wear plate temperature exceeds the highest temperature entryfor thismaterial’s stress line, the value will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the softwarethat the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and theconnection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial”caption.

Stress (Cold):Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specifiedin the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value iscalculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value islimited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Top Flange

Temperature:Themaximummeanmetal design temperature for the top flange.

Thickness:The top flange thickness.

Width: The width of the top flange.

159 | Page

Page 172: Design Calc s Manual

Saddle

Extension:Enter the distance the top flange extends beyond the outside of the outside stiffener.

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

Yield Strength:Thematerial yield strength at the top flange temperature. This value comes fromSection II, Part D, Table Y-1. In caseswhere the top flange temperature exceeds the highesttemperature entry for thismaterial’s yield line, the value will be zero. There are several materials thatdo not have clear matches in these tables. When a clear match cannot be found by the software’sassignment criteria, the software will calculate the yield strength using the external pressure chartand themethod described in UG-28(c)(2) Step 3. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials.If nomatch is found and the software cannot perform the described calculation, this value will bezero. Manually editing this field will inform the software that the user is defining thematerialdifferently than what is stored in the database and the connection to thematerial in the database willbe severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

160 | Page

Page 173: Design Calc s Manual

Saddle

Stress (Hot):Thematerial allowable stress at the top flange temperature. When a 3.5:1 safety factoris specified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor isspecified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D;furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creepgoverned cases. In caseswhere the top flange temperature exceeds the highest temperature entryfor thismaterial’s stress line, the value will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the softwarethat the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and theconnection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial”caption.

Stress (Cold):Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specifiedin the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value iscalculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value islimited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Saddle Design

Support Type:Select the location of the saddle web. Type I places the saddle web in themiddle.

Temperature:Themaximummeanmetal design temperature for the saddle.

Length: Enter the distance between the tops of outside stiffeners. This will automatically recalculateif the "Angle of contact of saddle with vessel" field is changed (See page 156).

Width - Top:Enter the width of the outside stiffener at the top of the stiffener.

Width - Bottom:Enter the width of the outside stiffener at the bottom of the stiffener.

Number of saddle stiffeners:Enter the number of stiffeners. The saddlemath assumes two stiffenersfor the outside; any additional stiffeners will be inside stiffeners.

161 | Page

Page 174: Design Calc s Manual

Saddle

Outside saddle stiffener thickness:Enter the thickness of the outside stiffeners.

Inside saddle stiffener thickness:Enter the thickness of the inside stiffener or stiffeners. If a saddlehas only two stiffeners, this field will be disabled.

Saddle web plate thickness:Enter the thickness of the web plate of the saddle.

Saddle Material

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

162 | Page

Page 175: Design Calc s Manual

Saddle

Yield Strength:Thematerial yield strength at the saddle temperature. This value comes fromSection II, Part D, Table Y-1. In caseswhere the saddle temperature exceeds the highesttemperature entry for thismaterial’s yield line, the value will be zero. There are several materials thatdo not have clear matches in these tables. When a clear match cannot be found by the software’sassignment criteria, the software will calculate the yield strength using the external pressure chartand themethod described in UG-28(c)(2) Step 3. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials.If nomatch is found and the software cannot perform the described calculation, this value will bezero. Manually editing this field will inform the software that the user is defining thematerialdifferently than what is stored in the database and the connection to thematerial in the database willbe severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Stress (Hot):Thematerial allowable stress at the saddle temperature. When a 3.5:1 safety factor isspecified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor isspecified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D;furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creepgoverned cases. In caseswhere the saddle temperature exceeds the highest temperature entry forthismaterial’s stress line, the value will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the softwarethat the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and theconnection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial”caption.

Stress (Cold):Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specifiedin the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value iscalculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value islimited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Base Plate/Anchor Bolt

Base Plate

Temperature:Themaximummeanmetal design temperature for the base plate. This value is alsoused for boltingmaterial.

163 | Page

Page 176: Design Calc s Manual

Saddle

Thickness:The base plate thickness.

Width:Thewidth of the base plate.

Length:The length of the base plate.

Ultimate 28 day concrete strength:The theoretical concrete strength after at least 28 days of setup.This value will bemultiplied by the concrete factor on theWind/Seismic tab under Tools > Defaults todetermine the allowable concrete strength.

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

164 | Page

Page 177: Design Calc s Manual

Saddle

Yield Strength:Thematerial yield strength at the saddle temperature. This value comes fromSection II, Part D, Table Y-1. In caseswhere the saddle temperature exceeds the highesttemperature entry for thismaterial’s yield line, the value will be zero. There are several materials thatdo not have clear matches in these tables. When a clear match cannot be found by the software’sassignment criteria, the software will calculate the yield strength using the external pressure chartand themethod described in UG-28(c)(2) Step 3. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials.If nomatch is found and the software cannot perform the described calculation, this value will bezero. Manually editing this field will inform the software that the user is defining thematerialdifferently than what is stored in the database and the connection to thematerial in the database willbe severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Stress (Hot):Thematerial allowable stress at the saddle temperature. When a 3.5:1 safety factor isspecified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor isspecified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D;furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creepgoverned cases. In caseswhere the saddle temperature exceeds the highest temperature entry forthismaterial’s stress line, the value will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the softwarethat the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and theconnection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial”caption.

Stress (Cold):Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specifiedin the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value iscalculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value islimited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Anchor Bolt

Num. of Bolts:The number of anchor bolts per base plate.

Bolt Size: The diameter of the bolt shaft. This field will be automatically completed if a bolt is selectedfrom the Bolt Search.

165 | Page

Page 178: Design Calc s Manual

Saddle

Nominal Diameter:The nominal diameter of the bolt. This field will be completed automatically if theBolt Search is used to select the bolts.

Threads Per Inch:The number of threads per inch on the bolt shaft. This field will be automaticallycompleted if a bolt is selected from the Bolt Search.

Root Area:The bolt root area based on the smallest diameter on the bolt. This field will automaticallybe completed if the Bolt Search is used to select the bolts.

Bolt Hole Diameter:The bolt hole diameter, not the bolt circle diameter. This field will fill inautomatically if the Bolt Search is used to select the bolts; the value will be determined based on thebolt nominal diameter.

Use sliding saddle support: Select this box to enter data for a sliding saddle support.

Allow sliding saddle support to support longitudinal loads:Select this box to allow the slidingsaddle to support longitudinal loads.

Coef. of thermal exp. from 70° to design temp.:Themean coefficient of thermal expansion of theshell material at the shell design temperature. Themean coefficient of thermal expansion based onthe TE tables fromSection II, Part D; column B is used in those tables. There are several materialsthat do not have clear matches in these tables. When a clear match cannot be found by thesoftware’s assignment criteria, this value will be zero. Manually editing this field will sever theconnection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Coef. of thermal exp. from 70° to MDMT:Themean coefficient of thermal expansion of the shellmaterial at the shell MDMT. Themean coefficient of thermal expansion based on the TE tables fromSection II, Part D; column B is used in those tables. There are several materials that do not haveclear matches in these tables. When a clear match cannot be found by the software’s assignmentcriteria, this value will be zero. Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial inthe database as indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Slot length: When using sliding saddles, one saddle will have slots instead of bolt holes. This is thelength of the sliding saddle slot.

166 | Page

Page 179: Design Calc s Manual

Saddle

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

Stress (Hot):Thematerial allowable stress at the saddle temperature. When a 3.5:1 safety factor isspecified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor isspecified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D;furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creepgoverned cases. In caseswhere the saddle temperature exceeds the highest temperature entry forthismaterial’s stress line, the value will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the softwarethat the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and theconnection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial”caption.

Stress (Cold):Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specifiedin the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value iscalculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value islimited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

167 | Page

Page 180: Design Calc s Manual

Saddle

Zick Stiffener

This tab is only available when the shell is stiffened by rings in the "Support Design Condition" on theGeneral Information tab (See page 156)

Quantity:This value will be locked to 1 if the ring is in the plane of the saddle or it will be locked to 2 ifthe ring is parallel to the saddle. This field is informational only.

Temperature:Themaximummeanmetal design temperature for the internal pressure case asdefined in UG-20(a).

Stiffener on the outside of the shell: Select this box if the stiffener is located on the outside of theshell.

d1, d2, t1, t2:Dimensions for the stiffener. See the configuration sketch in the component form formore information.

CA:Corrosion allowance affecting the zick stiffener.

Description:The label given for the component.

Stiffener Type:Select the configuration of the stiffener from the options provided.

Stiffener Material

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

168 | Page

Page 181: Design Calc s Manual

Saddle

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

Yield Strength:Thematerial yield strength at the stiffener temperature. This value comes fromSection II, Part D, Table Y-1. In caseswhere the stiffener temperature exceeds the highesttemperature entry for thismaterial’s yield line, the value will be zero. There are several materials thatdo not have clear matches in these tables. When a clear match cannot be found by the software’sassignment criteria, the software will calculate the yield strength using the external pressure chartand themethod described in UG-28(c)(2) Step 3. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials.If nomatch is found and the software cannot perform the described calculation, this value will bezero. Manually editing this field will inform the software that the user is defining thematerialdifferently than what is stored in the database and the connection to thematerial in the database willbe severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Stress (Hot):Thematerial allowable stress at the stiffener temperature. When a 3.5:1 safety factor isspecified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor isspecified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D;furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creepgoverned cases. In caseswhere the stiffener temperature exceeds the highest temperature entry forthismaterial’s stress line, the value will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the softwarethat the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and theconnection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial”caption.

169 | Page

Page 182: Design Calc s Manual

Saddle

Stress (Cold):Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specifiedin the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value iscalculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value islimited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

170 | Page

Page 183: Design Calc s Manual

171 | Page

LEG (return to Contents)

General Information 171

Leg Information 174

Base Plate/Bolt Information 175

Repad Information 179

General Information

Description:The label given for the component. It will appear in the component pane, the reportdialog, the summary pane, and at the top of the component report. This will default to the componenttype and component number. For example, the third nozzle for the vessel will start with a descriptionof Nozzle 3.

Mark: A shorthand reference for the component. It will also appear in the component report. Thedefault entry will be an abbreviation of the component type and the component number. Forexample, the second jacket shell for the vessel will start with amark SJ2.

Number of Leg Supports:Enter the number of leg supports on the vessel.

Base Plate to Vessel attachment Length:Distance from the bottom of the base plate to the bottom-most location where the legs attach to the vessel.

Length of Supports: The length of the vessel legs.

Direction of Applied Force:The angle that determines the results displayed in the leg report resultgrids. This value will not affect the worst case scenario results. The angle can range from 0° to(360/number of legs) - 1.

Page 184: Design Calc s Manual

Leg

Distance from Reference Line: The distance from the reference line datummeasured along the axisof the vessel to the top of the leg.

Temperature:Themaximummeanmetal design temperature for the leg.

Leg Material

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

Modulus of Elasticity:Thematerial modulus of elasticity based on the TM tables fromSection II, PartD. The value shown here is based on the applicable TM table and the leg temperature. In caseswhere the leg temperature exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s TM table, thevalue will be zero. There are several materials that do not have clear matches in these tables. Whena clear match cannot be found by the software’s assignment criteria, the software will insteadretrieve themodulus of elasticity from the external pressure chart assigned to thematerial. If thisattempt also fails, then the value will be zero. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

172 | Page

Page 185: Design Calc s Manual

Leg

Stress (Hot):Thematerial allowable stress at the temperature listed at the leg temperature. When a3.5:1 safety factor is specified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1safety factor is specified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U inSection II, Part D; furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowable stress tablesfor yield and creep governed cases. In caseswhere the leg temperature exceeds the highesttemperature entry for thismaterial’s stress line, the value will be zero. Manually editing this field willinform the software that the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in thedatabase and the connection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This is indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Stress (Cold):Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specifiedin the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value iscalculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value islimited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Factor B table: The external pressure table assigned to thematerial in the allowable stress tables inSection II, Part D. The table is used to determine the external pressure strength of the componentand also the longitudinal compressive strength. Selecting a Factor B table other than the oneassigned to thematerial will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Yield Strength:Thematerial yield strength at the leg temperature. This value comes fromSection II,Part D, Table Y-1. In caseswhere the leg temperature exceeds the highest temperature entry forthismaterial’s yield line, the value will be zero. There are several materials that do not have clearmatches in these tables. When a clear match cannot be found by the software’s assignment criteria,the software will calculate the yield strength using the external pressure chart and themethoddescribed in UG-28(c)(2) Step 3. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials. If nomatch isfound and the software cannot perform the described calculation, this value will be zero. Manuallyediting this field will inform the software that the user is defining thematerial differently than what isstored in the database and the connection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This isindicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

173 | Page

Page 186: Design Calc s Manual

Leg

Leg Information

Leg Support Type: Select the leg type from the available options.

Leg Method of Attachment: With certain leg types (angle, W-beam, T-bar, channel), there arevaryingmethods of attaching the leg to the vessel. Select the preferredmethod from the drop-downmenu. See the drawing in the leg form for more information.

Leg Information

d1, d2, t1, t2:Dimensions for the leg component cross-section. See the configuration sketch in thecomponent form for more information.

Pipe ID: The inside diameter of the pipe in the new condition; this is only available if Pipe is chosen asthe "Leg Support Type."

Pipe Thickness: The pipe leg thickness.

Description:The label given for the component.

Weld Attachment Length Top:The length of the weld along the top of the leg which attaches it to therepad or the shell.

Side:The length of the weld down one side of the leg which attaches it to the repad or the shell. Themethod assumes that this length of weld will exist on both sides of the leg.

Weld Leg Dimension:The fillet weld between the leg and the repad or the leg and the host.

Leg is molded to Head Curvature:Select this box if the leg has been coped to fit around part of thehead.

174 | Page

Page 187: Design Calc s Manual

Leg

Eccentricity: When the leg ismolded to the head curvature, enter the distance between the outsideof the shell wall and the centroid of the leg cross-section in the radial direction.

Use repad: Select this box to add a reinforcing pad between the leg and the shell.

Base Plate/Bolt Information

Base Plate Design Information

Base Plate Width: Enter the width of the base plate.

Base Plate Length: Enter the length of the base plate.

Base Plate Thickness:The thickness of the base plate.

Design Temperature: Themaximummeanmetal design temperature for the base plate. This value isalso used for boltingmaterial.

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

175 | Page

Page 188: Design Calc s Manual

Leg

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

Stress (Hot):Thematerial allowable stress at the base plate temperature. When a 3.5:1 safety factoris specified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor isspecified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D;furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creepgoverned cases. In caseswhere the base plate temperature exceeds the highest temperature entryfor thismaterial’s stress line, the value will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the softwarethat the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and theconnection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial”caption.

Stress (Cold):Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specifiedin the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value iscalculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value islimited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Yield Strength:Thematerial yield strength at the base plate temperature. This value comes fromSection II, Part D, Table Y-1. In caseswhere the base plate temperature exceeds the highesttemperature entry for thismaterial’s yield line, the value will be zero. There are several materials thatdo not have clear matches in these tables. When a clear match cannot be found by the software’sassignment criteria, the software will calculate the yield strength using the external pressure chartand themethod described in UG-28(c)(2) Step 3. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials.If nomatch is found and the software cannot perform the described calculation, this value will bezero. Manually editing this field will inform the software that the user is defining thematerialdifferently than what is stored in the database and the connection to thematerial in the database willbe severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

176 | Page

Page 189: Design Calc s Manual

Leg

Effective Length Factor: This value can range from 0.50 to greater than 2.0, however somereferences recommend that values less than 1.5 be avoided. Lower values aremore likely to result ina passing design and thus are considered less conservative.K=0.5 represents both ends of the legas being fixed with no lateral or rotational movement.K=1.0 represents both ends of the leg as beingpinned (rotational movement with no lateral movement).K=2.0 represents one end of the leg asbeing fixed and the other end as able tomove laterally.

Leg-to-baseplate Attachment Factor:The rigidity of the connection between the bottom of the leg andthe base plate. Lower values represent a less rigid connection and are consideredmoreconservative. The software will use the value entered in this field to calculate a corresponding valuein the "Effective Length Factor" field; to be consistent with the recommendations for that value, thisvalue should be in the range of 0.5 to 0.75.

Bending Coefficient:The bending coefficient can be calculated per equations in various references(e.g.,Manual of Steel Construction). This value should range between 0.85 and 1.0 for legcalculations; 1.0 is themore conservative value.

Bolt Design Information

Anchor Bolt Circle Diameter:The diameter of the circle that passes through the center of the boltpatterns on every base plate.

Diameter: The anchor bolt nominal diameter.

Root Area:The bolt root area based on the smallest diameter on the bolt. This field will automaticallybe completed if the Bolt Search is used to select the bolts.

Ultimate 28 day concrete strength:The theoretical concrete strength after at least 28 days of setup.This value will bemultiplied by the concrete factor on theWind/Seismic tab under Tools > Defaults todetermine the allowable concrete strength.

No. of Bolts:The number of anchor bolts per base plate.

Bolt Size / Threads Per Inch: These fields are completed automatically when a bolt size is selectedfrom the Bolt Search.

177 | Page

Page 190: Design Calc s Manual

Leg

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

Stress (Hot):Thematerial allowable stress at the base plate temperature. When a 3.5:1 safety factoris specified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor isspecified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D;furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creepgoverned cases. In caseswhere the base plate temperature exceeds the highest temperature entryfor thismaterial’s stress line, the value will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the softwarethat the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and theconnection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial”caption.

Stress (Cold):Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specifiedin the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value iscalculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value islimited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

178 | Page

Page 191: Design Calc s Manual

Leg

Repad Information

Repad Design Information

Temperature:Themaximummeanmetal design temperature for the reinforcing pad.

Repad Height/Length:Enter the height/length of the reinforcing pad (measured along the length ofthe shell).

Repad Width:Enter the width of the reinforcing pad (measured around the girth of the shell).

Repad Thickness:The thickness of the reinforcing pad.

Repad Weld Leg: The fillet weld leg between the repad and the host.

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

179 | Page

Page 192: Design Calc s Manual

Leg

Stress (Hot):Thematerial allowable stress at the repad temperature. When a 3.5:1 safety factor isspecified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor isspecified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D;furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creepgoverned cases. In caseswhere the repad temperature exceeds the highest temperature entry forthismaterial’s stress line, the value will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the softwarethat the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and theconnection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial”caption.

Stress (Cold):Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specifiedin the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value iscalculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value islimited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Yield Strength:Thematerial yield strength at the repad temperature. This value comes fromSectionII, Part D, Table Y-1. In caseswhere the repad temperature exceeds the highest temperature entryfor thismaterial’s yield line, the value will be zero.There are several materials that do not have clearmatches in these tables. When a clear match cannot be found by the software’s assignment criteria,the software will calculate the yield strength using the external pressure chart and themethoddescribed in UG-28(c)(2) Step 3. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials. If nomatch isfound and the software cannot perform the described calculation, this value will be zero. Manuallyediting this field will inform the software that the user is defining thematerial differently than what isstored in the database and the connection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This isindicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

180 | Page

Page 193: Design Calc s Manual

181 | Page

SUPPORTING LUG / SUPPORTING

R ING (return to Contents)

General Information 181

Lug Information 182

Bolt/Repad Information 185

General Information

Description:The label given for the component. It will appear in the component pane, the reportdialog, the summary pane, and at the top of the component report. This will default to the componenttype and component number. For example, the third nozzle for the vessel will start with a descriptionof Nozzle 3.

Mark: A shorthand reference for the component. It will also appear in the component report. Thedefault entry will be an abbreviation of the component type and the component number. Forexample, the second jacket shell for the vessel will start with amark SJ2.

Design Temperature: Themaximummeanmetal design temperature for the lug/support ringmaterial. This value is also used for boltingmaterial.

Base Plate Bottom Elevation: The distance from grade to the bottom of the base plate on thelug/support ring.

Number of Lug Supports:Enter the number of lug supports on the vessel. These are assumed to beevenly spaced around the vessel.

Number of Gussets/Gusset Pairs:For a supporting ring, enter the number of gussets or gusset pairs.The selection in the "Gusset Type" field determineswhether the gussets will be single or paired.These are assumed to be evenly spaced around the vessel.

Page 194: Design Calc s Manual

Supporting Lug / Supporting Ring

Distance from Reference Line: The distance from the reference line datummeasured along the axisof the vessel to the top of the lug/support ring.

Gusset Type: Select from the four available gusset types. Single gusset typeswill have a number ofevenly spaced gussets equal to the value in the "Number of Lug Supports" field; double gusset typeswill have a number of evenly spaced gusset pairs equal to this value. For single gusset types, eachgusset will be attached to the center of the bottom bar and the center of the top bar if one is present.Double gusset typeswill have each gusset in the pair spaced symmetrically around the center of thebottom bar and the center of the top bar if one is present.

Use Localized Stress:Select this box to also check local stresses in the host shell.

Lug Information

Top Extension: Radial distance from the outside shell wall measured at the center of the topplate/ring. See the figure on theGeneral Information tab for more information.

Bottom Extension: Radial distance from the outside shell wall measured at the center of the bottomplate/ring. See the figure on theGeneral Information tab for more information.

Bearing Length: The length - measured in the radial distance - that the bottom plate/ring is in contactwith the support column/structure. See the figure on theGeneral Information tab for moreinformation.

Weld Leg:The fillet weld leg between the lug and the repad or the lug and the host. Themethodassumes that weld is put down on all edges in contact with the shell.

Gusset Height: See the figure on theGeneral Information tab for more information.

Gusset Angle: This value is calculated from the other gusset inputs. See the figure on theGeneralInformation tab for more information.

Top Plate Thickness: The thickness of the top plate/ring. This field is only available when a gussettype with a top bar is selected (See page 181).

182 | Page

Page 195: Design Calc s Manual

Supporting Lug / Supporting Ring

Base Plate Thickness: The thickness of the base plate/bottom ring.

Base Plate Width: For support lugs, this is the width of the base plate. The top plate width (if a topplate is used) will be set to this value aswell.

Gusset Thickness: The thickness of each gusset.

Gusset Spacing: The spacing between gussets in a pair. This field is only available when a doublegusset type is selected (See page 181).

Use repad:Select this box to add a reinforcing pad to the lug design. This field does not apply tosupport rings.

Lug Material

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

183 | Page

Page 196: Design Calc s Manual

Supporting Lug / Supporting Ring

Modulus of Elasticity:Thematerial modulus of elasticity based on the TM tables fromSection II, PartD. The value shown here is based on the applicable TM table and the design temperature listed forlug. In caseswhere the lug temperature listed exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s TM table, the value will be zero. There are several materials that do not have clearmatches in these tables. When a clear match cannot be found by the software’s assignment criteria,the software will instead retrieve themodulus of elasticity from the external pressure chart assignedto thematerial. If this attempt also fails, then the value will be zero. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials. Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the databaseas indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption. 

Stress (Hot):Thematerial allowable stress at the lug temperature. When a 3.5:1 safety factor isspecified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor isspecified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D;furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creepgoverned cases. In caseswhere the lug temperature exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s stress line, the value will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the software that theuser is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and the connection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Stress (Cold):Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specifiedin the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value iscalculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value islimited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Factor B table: The external pressure table assigned to thematerial in the allowable stress tables inSection II, Part D. The table is used to determine the external pressure strength of the componentand also the longitudinal compressive strength. Selecting a Factor B table other than the oneassigned to thematerial will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

184 | Page

Page 197: Design Calc s Manual

Supporting Lug / Supporting Ring

Yield Strength:Thematerial yield strength at the lug temperature. This value comes fromSection II,Part D, Table Y-1. In caseswhere the lug temperature exceeds the highest temperature entry forthismaterial’s yield line, the value will be zero. There are several materials that do not have clearmatches in these tables. When a clear match cannot be found by the software’s assignment criteria,the software will calculate the yield strength using the external pressure chart and themethoddescribed in UG-28(c)(2) Step 3. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials. If nomatch isfound and the software cannot perform the described calculation, this value will be zero. Manuallyediting this field will inform the software that the user is defining thematerial differently than what isstored in the database and the connection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This isindicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Bolt/Repad Information

Bolt Design Information

No. of Anchor Bolts: The number of anchor bolts per base plate.

Bolt Circle Diameter:The diameter of the circle that passes through the center of the bolt patterns onevery base plate.

Diameter: The anchor bolt nominal diameter.

Root Area:The bolt root area based on the smallest diameter on the bolt. This field will automaticallybe completed if the Bolt Search is used to select the bolts.

Bolt Size / Threads Per Inch: These fields are completed automatically when a bolt size is selectedfrom the Bolt Search.

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

185 | Page

Page 198: Design Calc s Manual

Supporting Lug / Supporting Ring

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

Stress (Hot):Thematerial allowable stress at the lug temperature. When a 3.5:1 safety factor isspecified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor isspecified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D;furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creepgoverned cases. In caseswhere the lug temperature exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s stress line, the value will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the software that theuser is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and the connection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Stress (Cold):Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specifiedin the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value iscalculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value islimited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Repad Design Information

Repad Design Temperature:Themaximummeanmetal design temperature for the reinforcing pad.

Repad Height:Enter the height of the reinforcing pad (measured along the length of the shell).

Repad Thickness:The thickness of the reinforcing pad.

186 | Page

Page 199: Design Calc s Manual

Supporting Lug / Supporting Ring

Repad Width:Enter the width of the reinforcing pad (measured around the girth of the shell).

Repad Weld Leg: The fillet weld leg between the repad and the host.

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

Stress (Hot):Thematerial allowable stress at the repad temperature. When a 3.5:1 safety factor isspecified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor isspecified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D;furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creepgoverned cases. In caseswhere the repad temperature exceeds the highest temperature entry forthismaterial’s stress line, the value will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the softwarethat the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and theconnection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial”caption.

187 | Page

Page 200: Design Calc s Manual

Supporting Lug / Supporting Ring

Stress (Cold):Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specifiedin the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value iscalculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value islimited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Yield Strength:Thematerial yield strength at the repad temperature. This value comes fromSectionII, Part D, Table Y-1. In caseswhere the repad temperature exceeds the highest temperature entryfor thismaterial’s yield line, the value will be zero. There are several materials that do not have clearmatches in these tables. When a clear match cannot be found by the software’s assignment criteria,the software will calculate the yield strength using the external pressure chart and themethoddescribed in UG-28(c)(2) Step 3. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials. If nomatch isfound and the software cannot perform the described calculation, this value will be zero. Manuallyediting this field will inform the software that the user is defining thematerial differently than what isstored in the database and the connection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This isindicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

188 | Page

Page 201: Design Calc s Manual

189 | Page

SKIRT / INTERMEDIATE SUPPORT (return to Contents)

Description:The label given for the component. It will appear in the component pane, the reportdialog, the summary pane, and at the top of the component report. This will default to the componenttype and component number. For example, the third nozzle for the vessel will start with a descriptionof Nozzle 3.

Mark: A shorthand reference for the component. It will also appear in the component report. Thedefault entry will be an abbreviation of the component type and the component number. Forexample, the second jacket shell for the vessel will start with amark SJ2.

Skirt/Support Type:Select whether the skirt or intermediate support is cylindrical or conical.

Use Diameter:This option is only available for some components. The user may choose to inputdimensions as the inside dimensions or the outside dimensionswhere this option is available. Forsome components (such as shell), the use of outside dimensions for internal pressure calculationsmay result in a slightly higher required thickness.

Temperature:Themaximummeanmetal design temperature for the skirt/intermediate support.

Diameter:The component diameter in the new condition. The selection in the “Use Diameter” areadetermineswhether this is the inside or outside diameter of the component. In the context of curvedheads, this value is specifically the skirt diameter. For circular flat heads, this is the diameter asdefined in per the configuration in UG-34.

Top Diameter:For conical skirts and supports, enter the diameter of the top.

Cone Angle: The half-apex angle (half of the included angle) of the conical skirt or support. This fieldis algebraically connected to the “Diameter”, “Top Diameter”, and “Height” fields. Entering the “ConeAngle” will solve for the “Height”; entering the “Height” will solve for the “Cone Angle.”

Height:The axial length of the conical skirt or support. This field is algebraically connected to the“Diameter”, “Top Diameter”, and “Cone Angle” fields. Entering the “Cone Angle” will solve for the“Height”; entering the “Height” will solve for the “Cone Angle.”

Page 202: Design Calc s Manual

Skirt / Intermediate Support

Length: Enter the length of the cylindrical skirt/intermediate support.

Joint Efficiency (Circ.):The joint efficiency of the circumferential joints (girth seams) in theskirt/intermediate support. Thismay be determined from Table UW-12 for welded joints, howeverseveral referenceswould limit this value to 70% depending on how it is attached to the vessel walland/or base ring.

Nominal Thickness:The skirt thickness in the new condition.

CA:Corrosion allowance on the inside of the component (concave side).

Long. Factor A:This is the Factor A that is determined in Step 1 of UG-23(b)(2). Factor A isdetermined using the corroded dimensions. For pipe, this is based on nominal thickness as opposedtominimum thickness.

Long. Factor B:The allowable longitudinal compressive stress determined in Step 2 of UG-23(b)(2)as B. Factor B is determined at the temperature listed for the internal pressure condition. Note thatthis is not the same Factor B that is determined for external pressure strength; themodulus valuethat is sometimes used in these calculations is from the external pressure chart, not from the TMtables.

Skirt/Intermediate Support Material

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

190 | Page

Page 203: Design Calc s Manual

Skirt / Intermediate Support

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

Modulus of Elasticity:Thematerial modulus of elasticity based on the TM tables fromSection II, PartD. The value shown here is based on the applicable TM table and the skirt temperature. In caseswhere the skirt temperature exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s TM table, thevalue will be zero. There are several materials that do not have clear matches in these tables. Whena clear match cannot be found by the software’s assignment criteria, the software will insteadretrieve themodulus of elasticity from the external pressure chart assigned to thematerial. If thisattempt also fails, then the value will be zero. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Stress (Hot):Thematerial allowable stress at the skirt temperature. When a 3.5:1 safety factor isspecified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor isspecified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D;furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creepgoverned cases. In caseswhere the skirt temperature exceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s stress line, the value will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the software that theuser is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and the connection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Stress (Cold):Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specifiedin the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value iscalculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value islimited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

191 | Page

Page 204: Design Calc s Manual

Skirt / Intermediate Support

Factor B table: The external pressure table assigned to thematerial in the allowable stress tables inSection II, Part D. The table is used to determine the external pressure strength of the componentand also the longitudinal compressive strength. Selecting a Factor B table other than the oneassigned to thematerial will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Yield Strength:Thematerial yield strength at the skirt temperature listed for the internal pressurecondition. This value comes fromSection II, Part D, Table Y-1. In caseswhere the skirt temperatureexceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s yield line, the value will be zero. There areseveral materials that do not have clear matches in these tables. When a clear match cannot befound by the software’s assignment criteria, the software will calculate the yield strength using theexternal pressure chart and themethod described in UG-28(c)(2) Step 3. This ismore commonwithnon-ferrousmaterials. If nomatch is found and the software cannot perform the describedcalculation, this value will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the software that the user isdefining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and the connection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

192 | Page

Page 205: Design Calc s Manual

193 | Page

BASE R ING (return to Contents)

General Information 193

Base Ring 194

Anchor Bolt 196

Gusset/Compression 198

Designing a Base Ring Without a Skirt 199

General Information

Description:The label given for the component. It will appear in the component pane, the reportdialog, the summary pane, and at the top of the component report. This will default to the componenttype and component number. For example, the third nozzle for the vessel will start with a descriptionof Nozzle 3.

Mark: A shorthand reference for the component. It will also appear in the component report. Thedefault entry will be an abbreviation of the component type and the component number. Forexample, the second jacket shell for the vessel will start with amark SJ2.

Calculate Skirt Stress:Select this box to add a special skirt check to the base ring report; this willexamine the skirt for adequacy under the load carried into the skirt from the external bolting chair ortop ring designs. The calculation is considered very conservative in many cases since it does notadjust for the gusset spacing. In general, it is recommended to use this setting when the distancebetween the gussets is at least two times the distance between the outside of the skirt and the boltcircle.

Configuration

Select from the following configuration options:

Page 206: Design Calc s Manual

Base Ring

Base Ring only:The skirt is welded to the base ring. Gussets, compression chairs, and top rings arenot part of the design.

Base Ring with gussets only:The skirt is welded to the base ring with gussets attached to the basering and the skirt. Compression chairs and top rings are not part of the design.

Base Ring with centered anchor bolt:The skirt is welded to the base ring and a half obround shapedgusset is inserted into the skirt wall and attached to it. The anchor bolt circle is then equal to thediameter at themean thickness of the skirt. The designer is responsible for considering the lost areaof the skirt due to the insertion of the gusset as the calculations do not check for it. Compressionchairs and top rings are not part of the design.

Base Ring with gussets and complete top ring:The skirt is abutting the base ring and is attached toit. The top ring inside diameter is attached to the skirt outside diameter; the two valuesmust beequal. The gussets are placed evenly around the entire skirt and are attached to both the top andbottom ring and the skirt.

Base Ring with gussets and compression plate (chairs):The skirt is abutting the base ring and isattached to it. The compression plates are spread evenly around the entire vessel and do not form acontinuous ring; they are attached to the skirt and to a gusset pair. A pair of gussets is placedsymmetrically around each anchor bolt and attached to the skirt, the base ring, and the compressionplate.

Base Ring

Temperature:Themaximummeanmetal design temperature for the base ring.

Base Plate Thickness:The thickness of the base plate.

Base Plate O.D.:The outside diameter of the base plate in the new condition.

Base Plate I.D.:The inside diameter of the base plate in the new condition.

194 | Page

Page 207: Design Calc s Manual

Base Ring

Skirt O.D. at Bottom: The outside diameter of the skirt where it intersects the bottom of the base ring.This value will fill in based on the skirt design.

Base Plate Width: The width of the base ring. This is calculated from the base ring OD and ID.

Width, Outside of Skirt:Thewidth of the base ring outside of the skirt OD. This is calculated from thebase ring OD and the skirt OD (at the bottom).

Base Ring Material

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

195 | Page

Page 208: Design Calc s Manual

Base Ring

Yield Strength:Thematerial yield strength at the base ring temperature. This value comes fromSection II, Part D, Table Y-1. In caseswhere the base ring temperature exceeds the highesttemperature entry for thismaterial’s yield line, the value will be zero. There are several materials thatdo not have clear matches in these tables. When a clear match cannot be found by the software’sassignment criteria, the software will calculate the yield strength using the external pressure chartand themethod described in UG-28(c)(2) Step 3. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials.If nomatch is found and the software cannot perform the described calculation, this value will bezero. Manually editing this field will inform the software that the user is defining thematerialdifferently than what is stored in the database and the connection to thematerial in the database willbe severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Anchor Bolt

Bolt Size: The diameter of the bolt shaft. This field will be automatically completed if a bolt is selectedfrom the Bolt Search.

Threads Per Inch:The number of threads per inch on the bolt shaft. This field will be automaticallycompleted if a bolt is selected from the Bolt Search.

Nominal Diameter:The nominal diameter of the bolt. This field will be completed automatically if theBolt Search is used to select the bolts.

Root Area:The bolt root area based on the smallest diameter on the bolt. This field will automaticallybe completed if the Bolt Search is used to select the bolts.

Number of Bolts:The actual number of bolts, not the number of bolt holes.

Bolt Circle:The diameter of the circle that passes through the center of each bolt.

Distance across flats of bolting nut: Enter the distancemeasured across the flats of the bolting nut.

196 | Page

Page 209: Design Calc s Manual

Base Ring

Ultimate 28 day concrete strength:The theoretical concrete strength after at least 28 days of setup.This value will bemultiplied by the concrete factor on theWind/Seismic tab under Tools > Defaults todetermine the allowable concrete strength.

Anchor Bolt Material

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

Stress (Hot):Thematerial allowable stress at the base ring temperature. When a 3.5:1 safety factoris specified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor isspecified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D;furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creepgoverned cases. In caseswhere the base ring temperature exceeds the highest temperature entryfor thismaterial’s stress line, the value will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the softwarethat the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and theconnection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial”caption.

197 | Page

Page 210: Design Calc s Manual

Base Ring

Stress (Cold):Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specifiedin the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value iscalculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value islimited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Gusset/Compression

Gusset Information

Thickness: The thickness of each gusset.

Depth: Radial dimension for the gusset plate. This is the greatest radial measurement for the "BaseRing with gussets only" configuration.

Height: Vertical dimension for the gusset plate. This is the greatest vertical measurement for the"Base Ring with gussets only" configuration.

Number of gussets:Enter the number of gussets. Thismust be at least the number of bolts. Typicallythis will be equal to either the number of bolts or two times the number of bolts.

Angle: This value is only available for the "Base Ring with gussets only" configuration. See the figure1 on theGeneral Information tab for more information (See page 193).

1

198 | Page

Page 211: Design Calc s Manual

Base Ring

Angle Starting Height:  This value is only available for the "Base Ring with gussets only"configuration. See the figure2 on theGeneral Information tab for more information (See page 193).

Maximum distance between gussets:Enter themaximumdistance from one gusset to the next. If thenumber of gussets equals the number of bolts, this valuemust equal the value in the "Maximumdistance between gussets straddling bolts" field.

Maximum distance between gussets straddling bolts: Enter themaximumdistance from one gussetto the next with a bolt in between. If number of gussets equals the number of bolts, this valuemustequal the value in the “Maximumdistance between gussets” field.

Compression Plate Information

Top Ring O.D.: The outside diameter of the top ring. This is only available in designswith a completetop ring.

Top Plate Depth:The depth of the top plate. This is only available in designswith a compressionplate.

Top Plate Width: The width of the top plate. This is only available in designswith a compressionplate. See the figure on theGeneral Information tab for more information (See page 193).

Top Ring/Plate Thickness: The thickness of the top plate. This is only available in designswith acomplete top ring or a compression plate. See the figure on theGeneral Information tab for moreinformation (See page 193).

Designing a Base Ring Without a Skirt

Though the software does not currently allow a base ring to be designed in the absence of a skirt, it ispossible to utilize a work-around to add a base ring to a flat bottom tank or another vessel without askirt. To do this, select "Skirt" as the support type on theGeneral tab of the Vessel Informationwindow. Add a skirt that has the same inputs as the shell except for the length. Enter 0.0001"(0.01mm) as the length.

199 | Page

Page 212: Design Calc s Manual

Base Ring

Adding a skirt of this length will have a negligible effect on the calculations and it will allow the basering report/math to run.

200 | Page

Page 213: Design Calc s Manual

201 | Page

ATTACHING STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS

When using DesignCalcs, it is important to pay close attention to your location in the Componentspanel. Certain types of components can only be added to the vessel, while othersmust have a host(such as a shell). Click here for more information about the component order.

Base Ring

In order to add a base ring/base plate to a vessel, the vessel orientationmust be vertical and skirtmust be selected as the support type on the Vessel Information window. Base rings and base platescan only be added to the vessel itself. Make sure the vessel name or number is highlighted on theComponents panel before attempting to select Base Ring/Base Plate from the Structural menu.

Intermediate Support

The location of this component in the component order is critical to the calculations.

In order to add an intermediate support to a vessel, the vessel orientationmust be vertical and skirtmust be selected as the support type on the Vessel Information window. Intermediate Support willonly be available from the Structural menu when the vessel itself is highlighted on the Componentspanel. If any component is highlighted - including the shell - Intermediate Support will be disabled.

Leg

In order to add legs to a vessel, the vessel orientationmust be vertical and unbraced legmust beselected as the support type on the Vessel Information window. Legs can only be added to the shell.Make sure the shell is highlighted on the Components panel before attempting to select Leg from theStructural menu.

Lug - Lifting

Lifting lugsmay be added to vertical or horizontal vessels. The lug design options vary based on thevessel orientation. Lifting lugs can only be added to the shell. Highlight the shell in the Componentspanel before selecting Lifting Lug from the Structural menu.

Page 214: Design Calc s Manual

Attaching Structural Elements

Lug - Support

In order to add supporting lugs to a vessel, the vessel orientationmust be vertical and lugmust beselected as the support type on the Vessel Information window. Supporting Lug will only be availablefrom the Structural menu when the shell is selected. If any other component or the vessel itself isselected, Supporting Lug will be disabled.

Saddle

In order to add a saddle to a vessel, the vessel orientationmust be horizontal and saddlemust beselected as the support type on the Vessel Information window. Saddle will only be available fromthe Structural menu when the vessel itself is highlighted on the Components panel. If anycomponent is highlighted - including the shell - Saddle will be disabled.

Skirt

The location of this component in the component order is critical to the calculations.

In order to add a skirt to a vessel, the vessel orientationmust be vertical and skirt must be selected asthe support type on the Vessel Information window. Skirt will only be available from the Structuralmenu when the vessel itself is highlighted on the Components panel. If any component is highlighted- including the shell - Skirt will be disabled.

Support Ring

In order to add a supporting ring to a vessel, the vessel orientationmust be vertical and support ringmust be selected as the support type on the Vessel Information window. Supporting Ring will only beavailable from the Structural menu when the shell is selected. If any other component or the vesselitself is selected, Supporting Ring will be disabled.

202 | Page

Page 215: Design Calc s Manual

203 | Page

DESIGNING A STRUCTURAL SUPPORT FOR A

JACKETED VESSEL

Youwill be able to add a structural support to the vessel shell but not to the jacket shell. This isbecause DesignCalcs does not support the attachment of structural elements to jacket components.Jacket closures are currently designed for pressure loads only.

To test whether the supports themselves are sufficient, create a second vessel and represent thejacket shell as a shell. This process is informational only as the software will not check the jacketclosures for the load path.

Page 216: Design Calc s Manual

204 | Page

REPORTS (return to Contents)

Showing the Code Edition in the Report Footer 204

Reports Tutorial 204

Report Troubleshooting: Report Fonts are Crowded 207

Showing the Code Edition in the Report Footer

To show the code edition/addenda on the report footer, click the Reports button on the Componentspanel and select "Current Code" from the Footer Options.

Reports Tutorial

The reports in DesignCalcs can be customized to include only the information you desire in the orderthat works for you. This document aims to assist you in creating your ideal reports.

Page 217: Design Calc s Manual

Reports

Report Defaults

Most default settings for the reports are located on the Report tab under Tools > Defaults. Certainsettings on other tabs can also affect the data that appears in the reports. On the Report tab, you candetermine the default print settings for your reports, such as the size of themargins and the fonts thatwill be used. You can also set the options for the appearance of certain elements and act to includeor remove specific calculations and information. If something is showing up on your report and itshouldn't be, or something isn't showing up that should, check the defaults to see if it's an option.

Cover Page

The contents of the cover page can be customized by selecting Customize Cover Page from theReportsmenu. The Cover Page tab can also be accessed fromVessel > Vessel Information on theComponents panel. The job and vessel numbers are drawn from the vessel information and cannotbe changed. Certain other content is also automatically imported from the vessel information, butthese values can be changed or deleted. This information is taken from the values in the VesselInformation window when the vessel is first created and saved. If changes aremade to thisinformation after the first save, the cover page will not reflect those changes.

The defaults for the cover page are located in Tools > Defaults > Cover Page. In addition to theoptions on the Cover Page tab, there are some checkboxes on the Report tab in the Cover Pagesection to determine what will be printed on each report.

Footer Options

You can choose whether to use the software version or the current code as the footer on yourreports.

Company Information

TheCompany tab on the Vessel Information window can be accessed via the Vessel menu on theComponents Panel or by selecting Company Information from the Reportsmenu. The page has afew basic fields available for input. Youmay also choose to reset to the default company information.The default settings are on theGlobal tab under Tools > Defaults.

205 | Page

Page 218: Design Calc s Manual

Reports

Bill of Materials

The list of materials included in the vessel can be customized by selecting Bill of Materials from theReportsmenu on the Components panel. This list can be grouped, sorted, filtered, andmanually re-ordered.When you have it how you want it, you can preview the final product fromwithin thecustomization window. The bill of materials is its own report and does not combine data with thecode calculations and other general information for the vessel.

Summary Report

Reports > Customize Summary Report opens the SummaryReport Information window. Here youcan add descriptions andmeasurements of weights, volumes, and areaswithin the vessel.

Printing Reports

Once you have all of your details entered, you are ready to generate your report.Reports > PrintReports opens the report builder. On this screen, you can add, remove and reorder the sections andsub-reports in your report. You have the option to add and remove sections one at a time oradd/remove all. Once a section or sub-report has been added to the report, you canmove it up anddown in the list.

206 | Page

Page 219: Design Calc s Manual

Reports

When your report contains the desired sections in the correct order, you have the option to print aphysical copy of the report or save it as a PDF. By default, the report will be saved to the samelocation as the vessel and the filenamewill consist of the job name and the vessel name separatedby an underscore (e.g., Job Name_Vessel Name.PDF). This can be adjusted when you save thereport.

Report Troubleshooting: Report Fonts are Crowded

Occasionally the font on a report will appear smashed together when you create a PDF. This articlewill take you through the steps to adjust your computer's DPI and Display settings to resolve thisissue.

Please check your Display DPI and Resolution Settings. The DPI should be set at 100% or 96 DPI.The text size should be set to "Smaller" or 100%. Either one or both of these settings can cause thecreation of the PDF to be skewed or misaligned.

207 | Page

Page 220: Design Calc s Manual

Reports

Windows 7/Vista

Right click on your Desktop and select the screen resolution option, then click the "Make text andother items larger or smaller" link.

Select "Smaller-100%" and click Apply. Youmay need to restart your machine for the changes totake effect.

208 | Page

Page 221: Design Calc s Manual

Reports

Youwill need to recreate any PDFs that were problematic. If the fonts are still crowded, return to thescreen above and click the "Set custom text size (DPI)" link in the blue sidebar. This setting shouldalso be at 100%.

Windows XP

Right click on your desktop and select Properties. Click the Advanced button on the Settings tab.

209 | Page

Page 222: Design Calc s Manual

Reports

On theGeneral tab, change the DPI setting to "Normal size (96 DPI)".

210 | Page

Page 223: Design Calc s Manual

Reports

Youwill need to recreate any PDFs that were problematic.

211 | Page

Page 224: Design Calc s Manual

212 | Page

WRC-107 ANALYSIS (return to Contents)

General Info 212

Vessel/Attachment 213

Loads 218

WRC-107 Analysis Tips 220

Understanding the Pressure Stress Calculations in the DesignCalcs WRC-107Implementation 223

General Info

Design Information

WRC 107 Description:The label given for the analysis. It will appear in the analysis pane, the reportdialog, the summary pane, and at the top of the analysis report. This will default to the analysis typeand analysis number. For example, the thirdWRC-107 for the vessel will start with a description ofWRC-107 3.

Drawing No: The drawing number associated with the component. This does not refer to anydrawings that are generated in the software and it is listed here for the user's reference. It will defaultto the drawing number input on the vessel screen.

Allowable Combined Stress:Select which combination of stress, yield, and their respectivemultipliers will be used to determine the allowable combined stress. The stressmultiplier is shown asCs and the yield multiplier is shown asCy.

Consider Attachment Properties:Select the box to consider attachment properties whendetermining the allowable combined stress. When attachment properties are considered, theminimumof the selected yield or of the stress of the host or attachment is used to determine theallowable stress.

Page 225: Design Calc s Manual

WRC-107 Analysis

Internal Pressure: The internal design pressure (pressure on the concave side). This value is gaugepressure.

Temperature:Themaximummeanmetal design temperature at the junction of the host and theattachment.

Stress Multiplier:The number bywhich stress ismultiplied when determining the allowablecombined stress.

Yield Multiplier:The number bywhich yield ismultiplied when determining the allowable combinedstress.

Vessel Type:Select the type of vessel (host) from the available options. The type of vesseldetermines the options available in the "Attachment Type" field.

Attachment Type:Select the type of attachment from the available options.When the "Vessel Type"is Cylindrical, nozzles are Cylinder attachments; for Spherical or Elliptical vessels, nozzles areHollow Cylinders.

Vessel/Attachment

Vessel Information

Diameter:The component diameter in the new condition. Enter the diameter and select whether thevalue represents the inside or outside diameter. For Elliptical host types, this should be the effectiveinside spherical diameter at the location of the junction.

Thickness:This value is in the new condition.

CA:Corrosion allowance on the inside of the component (concave side).

213 | Page

Page 226: Design Calc s Manual

WRC-107 Analysis

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Mic. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

Modulus of Elasticity:Thematerial modulus of elasticity based on the TM tables fromSection II, PartD. The value shown here is based on the applicable TM table at the temperature for the junction ofthe host and attachment. In caseswhere this temperature exceeds the highest temperature entry forthismaterial’s TM table, the value will be zero. There are several materials that do not have clearmatches in these tables. When a clear match cannot be found by the software’s assignment criteria,the software will instead retrieve themodulus of elasticity from the external pressure chart assignedto thematerial. If this attempt also fails, then the value will be zero. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials. Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the databaseas indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

214 | Page

Page 227: Design Calc s Manual

WRC-107 Analysis

Stress (Hot):Thematerial allowable stress at the temperature for the junction of the host andattachment. When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strengthfrom Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in theallowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases. In caseswhere this temperatureexceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s stress line, the value will be zero. Manuallyediting this field will inform the software that the user is defining thematerial differently than what isstored in the database and the connection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This isindicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Stress (Cold):Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specifiedin the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value iscalculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value islimited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Yield Strength:Thematerial yield strength at the temperature for the junction of the host andattachment. This value comes fromSection II, Part D, Table Y-1. In caseswhere this temperatureexceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s yield line, the value will be zero. There areseveral materials that do not have clear matches in these tables. When a clear match cannot befound by the software’s assignment criteria, the software will calculate the yield strength using theexternal pressure chart and themethod described in UG-28(c)(2) Step 3. This ismore commonwithnon-ferrousmaterials. If nomatch is found and the software cannot perform the describedcalculation, this value will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the software that the user isdefining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and the connection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Attachment Information

Outside Radius:This field is only available for the cylinder, hollow cylinder, and rigid cylinderattachment types. See the figure on theGeneral Info tab for more information (See page 212)

Square Width: The outside width of one side of a square attachment. See the figure on theGeneralInfo tab for more information (See page 212).

215 | Page

Page 228: Design Calc s Manual

WRC-107 Analysis

Length circ. dir.: The outside length of a rectangular attachment in the circumferential direction withrespect to the host. See the figure on theGeneral Info tab for more information (See page 212).

Length long. dir.:The outside length of a rectangular attachment in the longitudinal direction withrespect to the host. See the figure on theGeneral Info tab for more information (See page 212).

Thickness:This value is in the new condition.

CA:Corrosion allowance on the inside of the component (concave side).

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Mic. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

Density: Thematerial density based on table PRD fromSection II, Part D. For thosematerials thatdid not have a clear match in this table, every effort wasmade to assign conservative values.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the"UnlistedMaterial" caption.

216 | Page

Page 229: Design Calc s Manual

WRC-107 Analysis

Modulus of Elasticity:Thematerial modulus of elasticity based on the TM tables fromSection II, PartD. The value shown here is based on the applicable TM table at the temperature for the junction ofthe host and attachment. In caseswhere this temperature exceeds the highest temperature entry forthismaterial’s TM table, the value will be zero. There are several materials that do not have clearmatches in these tables. When a clear match cannot be found by the software’s assignment criteria,the software will instead retrieve themodulus of elasticity from the external pressure chart assignedto thematerial. If this attempt also fails, then the value will be zero. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials. Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the databaseas indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Stress (Hot):Thematerial allowable stress at the temperature for the junction of the host andattachment. When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strengthfrom Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in theallowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases. In caseswhere this temperatureexceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s stress line, the value will be zero. Manuallyediting this field will inform the software that the user is defining thematerial differently than what isstored in the database and the connection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This isindicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Stress (Cold):Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specifiedin the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value iscalculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value islimited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

217 | Page

Page 230: Design Calc s Manual

WRC-107 Analysis

Yield Strength:Thematerial yield strength at the temperature for the junction of the host andattachment. This value comes fromSection II, Part D, Table Y-1. In caseswhere this temperatureexceeds the highest temperature entry for thismaterial’s yield line, the value will be zero. There areseveral materials that do not have clear matches in these tables. When a clear match cannot befound by the software’s assignment criteria, the software will calculate the yield strength using theexternal pressure chart and themethod described in UG-28(c)(2) Step 3. This ismore commonwithnon-ferrousmaterials. If nomatch is found and the software cannot perform the describedcalculation, this value will be zero. Manually editing this field will inform the software that the user isdefining thematerial differently than what is stored in the database and the connection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This is indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Loads

Solve For:When stresses are selected, the analysis will calculate the combined stress from all of theloads entered.When one of the other options is selected, the analysis will set the combined stress toitsmaximumand back solve for the item selected with the other loads given.

Loads

Radial Load:For both heads and cylinders as hosts, the radial load P is positive if it is inward.

Shear load and overturning moment inputs: For heads, decide arbitrary 1-1 and 2-2 axes that arenormal to each other. A shear load V2 acts in the 1-1 direction and causes theM1moment; a shearload V1 acts in the 2-2 direction and causes theM2moment. For cylindrical hosts, the axes are thelongitudinal and circumferential directions: a positive shear load VC acts in the positivecircumferential direction and creates the positivemomentMC; the positive shear load VL acts in thepositive longitudinal direction and creates the positivemomentML. See the coordinate system ontheGeneral Info tab for more information (See page 212).

External torsional moment:The torsional load sign is arbitrary and this input is only available for thecylinder, hollow cylinder, and rigid cylinder attachment types.

Use a repad:Select the box to add a reinforcing pad to the design. This option is only available forcylinder and hollow cylinder attachment types.

218 | Page

Page 231: Design Calc s Manual

WRC-107 Analysis

Use Stress Concentration Factor: WRC-107, Appendix B, identifies this as an adjustment for fatigueconsiderations at the junction between the host and the attachment. Review WRC-107 for moreinformation.

Repad

Outside Diameter:The component diameter in the new condition.

Thickness:The repad thickness.

Stress Concentration Factors

Fillet radius: The radius of the concavity of the fillet weld between the attachment and the host orpad.

Kn:The stress concentration factor for themembrane stress component based on the weld betweenthe attachment and the host or pad. This value can be found inWRC-107, Appendix B.

Kb:The stress concentration factor for the bending stress component based on the weld betweenthe attachment and the host or pad. This value can be found in Appendix B ofWRC-107.

Repad fillet radius:The radius of the concavity of the fillet weld between the pad and the host.

Repad Kn:The stress concentration factor for themembrane stress component based on the weldbetween the pad and the host. This value can be found inWRC-107, Appendix B.

Repad Kb:The stress concentration factor for the bending stress component based on the weldbetween the pad and the host. This value can be found in Appendix B ofWRC-107.

219 | Page

Page 232: Design Calc s Manual

WRC-107 Analysis

WRC-107 Analysis Tips

What is the WRC-107 Analysis? – TheWRC-107 Analysis calculates the combined local stressintensity from external loads at the junction of an attachment and a shell or head. Themethodmaybe employed for structural supports or nozzles.

What are the limitations? – The analysis is based on empirical data. Certain geometries fallingoutside this data have no experimental basis to support them and it is up to the designer to determineif themethod is a valid approximation outside the range covered by the empirical data. In addition,themethod does not cover stress from internal pressure; however, DesignCalcs does allow forinternal pressure loading. (See page 223)

The secondmajor limitation is the stress combination. Thismethod combines themembrane andbending stresses. Membrane only stresswill have a set of allowable stress criteria if you look toSection VIII, Division II, and the combinedmembrane and bending stresswill have its own allowablestress criteria. In addition, if you need to consider peak stress, the failuremodes you need to checkper Division II get more complicated.

Finally, theWRC-107 reference does not clearly indicate the attachment details for the attachmentto the host. When utilizing thismethod, be careful when considering tilted or hillside nozzles orattachments where full penetration groove welds are not used.

How does the WRC-107 coordinate system work? – See the figures below for reference. For bothheads and cylinders as hosts, the radial load P is positive if it is inward. Choose arbitrary 1-1 and 2-2axes that are normal to each other for heads. A shear load V2 acts in the 1-1 direction and causestheM1moment. A shear load V1 acts in the 2-2 direction and causes theM2moment.

For cylindrical hosts, the axes are the longitudinal direction and the circumferential direction. Apositive shear load VC acts in the positive circumferential direction and creates the positivemomentMC. The positive shear load VL acts in the positive longitudinal direction and creates the positivemoment ML.

220 | Page

Page 233: Design Calc s Manual

WRC-107 Analysis

How does the Solve For radio button work? –When stresses are selected, the analysis will calculatethe combined local stress intensity from all of the loads entered.When one of the other options isselected, the analysis will set the combined stress to itsmaximumand solve for the item selectedwith the other items set.

What should I enter for the stress multipliers? - Thesemultipliers are used to determine theallowable combined stress. Cs represents the stressmultiplier and Cy represents the yield multiplier.Youmay choose which combination of stress, yield, andmultiplier to use and whether to considerthe attachment properties. When the attachment properties are considered, theminimumof theselected yield, the stress of the host, or the stress of the attachment is used to determine theallowable stress.

221 | Page

Page 234: Design Calc s Manual

WRC-107 Analysis

The ideal values for the stressmultipliers depend on several factors, including the duration andgeography of the load. If the load is to be applied one time and then released (such as for lifting lugs),a higher allowablemay be justified. A typical operating nozzle load would be limited to a lowerallowable. See the stress classifications in Section VIII-II for further guidance. Pay special attentionto the primary local and secondary stresses and the slight differences between them.

An example of a typical allowable stress for primary local membrane stresswould be 1.5*S. Anexample of a typical allowable stress for primary local membrane plus secondary bending stresswould be Spswhere Spsmay be either 3*S or 2*Sy. Be careful when specifying 3*S if the allowablestress criteria is based on 90% yield instead of 66-2/3% yield.

When do I use the Stress Concentration Factor? – This is only used for cyclic type loadings or forbrittle materials. See appendix B inWRC-107 and proceed with caution.

How does the analysis handle reinforcing pads for nozzles? – The analysis will calculate thestresses at the periphery of the nozzle to host/pad combined thickness and it will calculate thestresses at the periphery of the pad diameter to host junction. This is probably a conservative leaningcheck unless the repad thickness is very close to external projection of the nozzle or the width of thepad is very narrow; in either of those cases, the check ismore accurate.

For a large diameter pad (e.g. a pad with 2x the diameter of the nozzle neck), it may be suitable toincrease the host thickness to represent the combined thickness of the pad and the host - assumingthe allowable stress of both are the same and the nozzle has a quality attachment detail to both thepad and the host wall.

Can I bump up the host thickness to represent the combined host and pad thickness for a structuralattachment – Yes, you can. However, this approximation is themost viable when the attachment isattached through the pad to the host wall and the details include full penetration groove welds. Inaddition, the pad should be fairly large compared to the attachment size (e.g. 8” x 8” pad for a 4”x 4”attachment) and the pad should have an allowable stress similar to the host.

How can I import a nozzle or a host that I have already designed? –On the Vessel/Attachment tab,select the Nozzle Browser to import the information for the nozzle and its host. To add a structuralattachment, select the host browser and bring the host information into theWRC-107 form. Thenyou canmanually enter the attachment information.

222 | Page

Page 235: Design Calc s Manual

WRC-107 Analysis

Why do I need to enter the diameter when the host is an elliptical head? – The analysis treats thehead as a sphere and uses the diameter entered to determine the spherical radius.

Are the wind loads, elevations, and diameters from the Vessel Information andAttachments/Loadings windows used in the WRC-107 Analysis? - In order for wind loads to beconsidered in theWRC-107 Analysis, theymust be directly entered on the Loads tab of theWRC-107 window. The analysis does not draw this data from any other location.

Understanding the Pressure Stress Calculations in the DesignCalcsWRC-107 Implementation

General

l TheWRC-107method only considers external loads and does not consider pressure.

l The pressure stress equations used in the DesignCalcs implementation of theWRC-107method arefor primary membrane stress caused from internal pressure.

l The stresses caused by the external loads are typically classified as primary local stress andsecondary bending stress (although this is not always the case).

l If pressure is considered for these calculations, the primary membrane stress from pressure will beadded stresses determined from the external loads.

Pressure Stress Calculation: Elliptical Host

The pressure stress for an elliptical host in theWRC-107method assumes that the host can act likea sphere at the location where the attachment/nozzle is placed. The diameter enteredmustrepresent an effective spherical diameter at this location. The formula is derived from the UG-27(d)formula fromASME SC VIII-I (setting E=1).

S ( )= 0.5PR

t P+ 0.2

Elliptical Host Pressure Stress vs. Elliptical Head Actual Stress

The Actual Stress formula for an elliptical head is derived fromASME SC VIII-I Appendix 1-4(c).

S E= ÷ 2PDoK

t P K− 2 ( − 0.1)

223 | Page

Page 236: Design Calc s Manual

WRC-107 Analysis

As you can see, these equations are not the same and thuswill produce different results.

In addition, the elliptical head form has a location to enter thin out; theWRC-107 form lacks this field,so if themath needs to consider local thinning at the attachment/nozzle, the thicknessmust bereducedmanually to reflect that. The Actual Stress in the elliptical head report also considersadjustment for the joint efficiency as joint efficiency is typically applied as a penalty to the allowableprimary stress.

224 | Page

Page 237: Design Calc s Manual

225 | Page

CONE TO CYLINDER ANALYSIS (return to Contents)

General Info 225

Pressure/Load 226

Stiffening Ring 227

General Info

Design Information

Juncture Description:The label given for the analysis. It will appear in the analysis pane, the reportdialog, the summary pane, and at the top of the analysis report. This will default to the analysis typeand analysis number. For example, the thirdWRC-107 for the vessel will start with a description ofWRC-107 3.

Juncture Location: Indicate the end of the cone on which the analysis will run. This field is forinformational purposes only.

Ring Temperature:Themaximummeanmetal design temperature for the ring.

Shell Information

Longitudinal Efficiency:The joint efficiency of the girth seam. Longitudinal stress pulls on theseseams.

Section Length:The unstiffened length of the vessel that the juncture falls in. This will default to theshell's unstiffened length (dimension L) from the External Pressure tab of the Shell (See page 22)

Page 238: Design Calc s Manual

Cone to Cylinder Analysis

Pressure/Load

Axial Load:The load per unit length on the junction. The check box to the right of the field toggles thisvalue between a tensile load and a compressive load.

For Internal Pressure

Internal Pressure: The internal design pressure (pressure on the concave side). This value is gaugepressure. When “Solve for Thickness” is selected, this value is an input and should not include statichead.When “Solve for Pressure” is selected, this value is a result. In the latter case, it represents thetotal internal pressure (design pressure plus head) that the component can handle andmeet code inthe absence of any other loadings.

Static Head:The internal pressure (pressure on the concave side) resulting from the static head ofthe fluid. The user must determine this value and input it accordingly. It will be added to the Pressureinput and the sumwill be used in the internal pressure calculations for the component. This field willnot be present when “Solve for Thickness” is selected.

For External Pressure

External Pressure:The external design pressure (pressure on the convex side). This value is gaugepressure. If the user wishes to consider the effect of static head for the external pressure case, thisinput must be altered to consider the effect.

Juncture is a line of support:Select this box to consider the junction as a line of support for thedesign of the vessel for vacuum.With this consideration, the juncturemust pass additionalrequirements. When the juncture is considered a line of support, the code does not require that thecone required thickness (external pressure) be at least that of the adjacent shell.

Check Cone Pe tr vs. Shell Pe tr:When the junction is not a line of support and this box is selected,the cone tr for the external pressure casemust be at least the shell tr for the external pressure caseor the junction analysis will fail. Clear this box to avoid performing this comparison. See UG-33(f) formore information.

226 | Page

Page 239: Design Calc s Manual

Cone to Cylinder Analysis

Stiffening Ring

Ring Information

Stiffener Location:Select whether a stiffening ring is present and, if so, whether the stiffener is in theshell or the cone.

External CA:Corrosion allowance on the outside of the component (convex side). This field isavailable for internal heads and for the inner components of a jacketed vessel.

Stiffener Dimensions:Enter the dimensions for the stiffener in the appropriate fields. See thediagram for more information.

Description:The label given for the component.

Ring Type:Select the type of stiffener from the available options.

Stiffener Material

Material: A brief description of the component material. When thematerial selection dialog is used,the default description is based on settings on theMaterials-Mic. tab under Tools > Defaults. Forexample, if the settings are for Spec and Type/Grade and thematerial is SA-516Grade 70, this fieldwill show SA-516Gr. 70. If the settings are instead just for Spec, the field will show SA-516. The fieldmay be edited by the user to say anything without breaking the relationship to thematerial database;while this flexibility can be very helpful, the user must take care to enter correct information.

Condition: A brief description of the component material. Similar to the "Material" field, thedescription will default a certain way based on settings on theMaterials-Misc. tab under Tools >Defaultswhen thematerial selection is used. This field may be edited by the user without breakingthe relationship to thematerial database. Aswith the “Material” field, the user must take care to entercorrect information.

227 | Page

Page 240: Design Calc s Manual

Cone to Cylinder Analysis

Factor B table: The external pressure table assigned to thematerial in the allowable stress tables inSection II, Part D. The table is used to determine the external pressure strength of the componentand also the longitudinal compressive strength. Selecting a Factor B table other than the oneassigned to thematerial will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Stress (Hot):Thematerial allowable stress at the temperature listed for the internal pressurecondition. When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specified in the vessel screen, this value comes fromSectionII, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table 1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 forBolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value is calculated based on the ultimate strength fromTable U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value is limited to the values listed in the allowablestress tables for yield and creep governed cases. In caseswhere this temperature exceeds thehighest temperature entry for thismaterial’s stress line, the value will be zero. Manually editing thisfield will inform the software that the user is defining thematerial differently than what is stored in thedatabase and the connection to thematerial in the database will be severed. This is indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Stress (Cold):Thematerial allowable stress at 70 °F (20 °C). When a 3.5:1 safety factor is specifiedin the vessel screen, this value comes fromSection II, Part D (Table 1A for FerrousMaterials, Table1B for Non-FerrousMaterials, and Table 3 for Bolting). If a 4:1 safety factor is specified, this value iscalculated based on the ultimate strength from Table U in Section II, Part D; furthermore, the value islimited to the values listed in the allowable stress tables for yield and creep governed cases.Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the database as indicated by the“UnlistedMaterial” caption.

Modulus of Elasticity:Thematerial modulus of elasticity based on the TM tables fromSection II, PartD. The value shown here is based on the applicable TM table at the temperature listed for theinternal pressure condition. In caseswhere this temperature exceeds the highest temperature entryfor thismaterial’s TM table, the value will be zero. There are several materials that do not have clearmatches in these tables. When a clear match cannot be found by the software’s assignment criteria,the software will instead retrieve themodulus of elasticity from the external pressure chart assignedto thematerial. If this attempt also fails, then the value will be zero. This ismore commonwith non-ferrousmaterials. Manually editing this field will sever the connection to thematerial in the databaseas indicated by the “UnlistedMaterial” caption.

228 | Page

Page 241: Design Calc s Manual

229 | Page

SPECIFYING LOADING CASES

Youmust define the loading cases you want to check in the structural support calculations.

If your leg/zick analysis/tower analysis/base ring/lug/support ring report is not showing anycalculations, access the loading cases by clicking the Vessel button on the Components panel.Select Vessel Information, go to theWind/Seismic tab, and click the Load Cases button.

Page 242: Design Calc s Manual

Specifying Loading Cases

Operating conditions reference the liquid input on the Liquid tab of the Vessel Attachment/Loadingswindow. These include static head from the components.

230 | Page

Page 243: Design Calc s Manual

Specifying Loading Cases

Empty conditions are without the liquid from the Attachment/Loadingswindow and do not includestatic head.

Vacuumwill run for the Pressurized conditions. Static head will be included forOperatingUnpressurized cases.

Occasional loadingswill consider wind/seismic loadings. Selecting Occasional Loadings enablestheWind and Seismic cases for the condition. These are based on theWind and Seismic codesselected on theGeneral tab of the Vessel Information window. For codesUBC-1997 and newer,these represent the Code's Allowable StressDesign loading cases (ASD) that contain aWind/Seismic element.

Sustained loadings do not consider wind/seismic loadings.

231 | Page

Page 244: Design Calc s Manual

232 | Page

UG-22 LOADINGS

DesignCalcs considers several of the loadings in UG-22, but it does not cover all possibilities.

Supplemental loads can be entered directly in a custom flange design, but the software does not dothe same check on the nozzle neck at this time.

DesignCalcs does have the ability to examine shells and cones for combined pressure, weight, statichead, and bending fromwind/seismic, depending on your design geometry and licensing.

Page 245: Design Calc s Manual

233 | Page

ATTACHMENTS /LOADINGS TUTORIAL

Once you have completed the design of your components and supports, you need to input theattachments, contents (including packing and liquid), insulation, applied forces, and wind loaddiameters of the vessel. This article will walk you through this process.

To begin, click the Vessel button on the Components panel and select "Attachments/Loads" from themenu.

Attachments Tab

The Attachments tab is where anyweights and horizontal loads that need to be included in thestructural analysis but are not already consideredmust be entered.

Note: The weights of your subcomponents (nozzles, stiffening rings, and flanges), jacketcomponents, or heat exchanger components, must be entered here to be considered.

Page 246: Design Calc s Manual

Attachments/Loadings Tutorial

Vertical Vessel

Packing Wire Mesh:At an elevation of 150 inches there is packing wiremesh to hold up packingmaterial. The weight of themesh is 50 pounds and, since the center of gravity of themesh is thesame as the axis of the vessel, the eccentricity is zero. Themesh is in place prior to the hydro test sothe "Include for Pressure Test" check box is selected.

Stiffening Ring: At an elevation of 225 inches a stiffening ring is attached to the inside of the vessel.The ring is a complete stiffening ring and is of constant cross section except for a few negligible sizedholes for draining. Because the ring is complete and not partial and is basically of constant crosssection, the weight of the ring is symmetric around the axis of the vessel and so the eccentricity iszero. Since the ring is in place before the hydro test, the "Include for Pressure Test" check box isselected.

Trays:At an elevation of 350 inches, two separate items exist: an attachment and a horizontal force.The trays are only 50 pounds, but they are not symmetric around the axis of the vessel so theydevelop an eccentricity which contributes to a bendingmoment.

The cross-section of the vessel is circular and a plane view of the elevation gives us 360 degrees inwhich to apply horizontal forces and eccentric weights. As the designer, you can arbitrarily pick yourzero reference point. You can select the direction of the uppermost eccentric load or uppermosthorizontal force as zero; you can select the direction north as zero. It does not matter what you selectas long as you are consistent over the entire height of the vessel.

234 | Page

Page 247: Design Calc s Manual

Attachments/Loadings Tutorial

In this case, the trays are creating a bendingmoment which is trying to bend the vessel in a direction15 degrees from the zero reference. At the same elevation, the applied horizontal force is creating ashear force in a direction 45 degrees from the zero reference, or 30 degrees from the direction of theeccentric trays (at lower plane elevations the shear force will have amoment associated with it dueto a vertical moment arm). These itemswere not an issue to be considered in the hydro test so theboxwas left unchecked.

Horizontal Vessel

In this case, at a distance of 25 inches left of the reference line is an attachment with a weight of 2500lb and a resultant horizontal force of 18,000 lb at a resultant direction that forms a 60° angle with thelongitudinal axis of the vessel. These itemswill not be included in the Zick Analysis or Saddle designfor the hydro test condition since the "Include for Pressure Test" box is not checked.

Some important points:

1. The distance from the reference line is here solely for your benefit at this time. It will appear on theAttachment/Loading report, but it will have no effect on the calculations.

2. The weight will be divided equally between the saddles; in this case, each saddle will see 1250 lb fromthis attachment weight.

3. The horizontal forces will be separated into a longitudinal and a transverse force with the followingrelationship:

235 | Page

Page 248: Design Calc s Manual

Attachments/Loadings Tutorial

F isHorizontal Force (18,000 lb in this case) and θ is the HorizontalResultant Direction (60° in this case). In this

example, the longitudinal force component FLFwill be 9000 lb and the transverse force component FTFwill be 15,

588 lb.

The FTF value will alwaysbe divided by two to find its effect on each saddle. The FLF value is different, though; its

ultimate effect will depend on certain inputs and whether a sliding saddle is used.

Wind Tab

TheWind tab is used to input wind load diameters other than those of the outside diameter of thecomponent.

Note: The wind load diameter will not automatically address expansion joints or jacket components.The information entered here should reflect those items.

236 | Page

Page 249: Design Calc s Manual

Attachments/Loadings Tutorial

Vertical Vessel

The default wind load diameter for cones and formed heads is the largest outside diameter of thecomponent. This tab can be used to reflect increased wind load area due to ladders, stiffening rings,and insulation, or simply tomake the calculationsmore conservative or easier to follow. This tab canalso be used to change the wind load diameter for conical sections to themean diameter. Theprogram calculates the wind area of each section as rectangular bymultiplying the height of thesection by the wind load diameter; this includes heads and cones.

PW is the wind pressure determined from the wind code selection and inputs. EE and SE are theending and starting elevations, respectively. DW is the wind load diameter for the segment. For this

example, assume PW = 0.25 psi at all elevations. The value of FW for the segment going from 0” to

85” will be 1593.75 lb. The value of FW for the segment going from 85” to 485” will be 6500.00 lb. The

value of FW for the segment going from 485” to 511” will be 292.50 lb.

Horizontal Vessel

The values you enter for the wind load diameter will determine the wind load area in both thelongitudinal and transverse directions. If a value is not entered here, the wind load areaswill becalculated using the vessel outside diameter. The horizontal forceswill be separated into alongitudinal and a transverse force with the following relationship:

237 | Page

Page 250: Design Calc s Manual

Attachments/Loadings Tutorial

PW is the wind pressure determined from the wind code selection and inputs. EP and SP are the

ending and starting points, respectively. DW is the wind load diameter. For this example, assume PW= 0.5 psi. The longitudinal force component FLWwill be 1413 lb and the transverse force component

FTWwill be 21600 lb. The FTW value will always be divided by two to find its effect on each saddle.

The FLW value is different, though; its ultimate effect will depend on certain inputs and whether a

sliding saddle is used.

Insulation Tab

The Insulation tab is used to input insulation that may exist on the outside of the vessel. This tab isonly available for vertical vessels.

In the above example, the section of the vessel with insulation has an outside diameter of 60 inches(the 60” comes from the component info and is not seen in this screen), so the outside diameter ofthe insulation is 65 inches. The weight of the insulation is then automatically calculated from thisinformation. The weight of the insulation is calculated using the following formula:

238 | Page

Page 251: Design Calc s Manual

Attachments/Loadings Tutorial

γIns is the specific weight of the insulation: for Customary units, the specific weight and density arethe same; for Metric units, multiply the density times gravity to get the specific weight. EE and SE arethe ending and starting elevations, respectively. OD and ID are the insulation outside and inside

diameters, respectively. For this example, the insulation weight is 3407 lb.

In this case, the insulation was placed on the vessel prior to the hydro test so the "Include forPressure Test" boxwas selected. The column on the far right only applies to vessels supported byskirts. If the elevations considered cross the boundary between the pressure boundary and the skirt(e.g. the bottom head is inside the skirt), specify whether the insulation is on the vessel (pressureboundary) or the skirt. An entry needs to be added to the wind tab to consider the effect of the windload area of this insulation.

Liquid Tab

The Liquid tab allows for the input of liquids for the operating condition (the hydro condition will floodthe vessel with water automatically) based on the starting and ending elevation in the vessel.

Note: This tab and the Summary page in the report are independent from each other. The floodedweight on the SummaryReport will not be used in the operating condition calculations for yoursupport design. Any fluid weight you wish to be considered in your operating conditionmust beentered here.

239 | Page

Page 252: Design Calc s Manual

Attachments/Loadings Tutorial

Vertical Vessel

If different rows are entered, the programwill order them so that the least density is on top and thegreatest is on the bottom. In the row where the starting elevation is the crown of the bottom head,any value less than or equal to the elevation of the crown of the bottom head will suffice. Thesoftware will only calculate the volume of fluid that can possibly exist within the vessel wall. Thesame is true for the row with the ending elevation of fluid being the crown of the top head - any valueequal to or greater than the elevation of the top crownwill suffice. In summary, if you wish to simplyflood the vessel, enter a 0 for the starting elevation and a rather high value (like 5000) for the endingelevation and the software will take care of the rest. The equation for the weight of liquid betweentwo elevations for a vertical vessel is show below.

γliquid is the specific weight of the liquid: for Customary units, the specific weight and density are thesame; for Metric units, multiply the density times gravity to get the specific weight. EE and SE are the

ending and starting elevations, respectively. ID is the inside diameter of the vessel. For this example,

the ID is 60”, so the liquid weight is 12,756 lb.

Horizontal Vessel

In the above example, the liquid is slightlymore than twice the density of water and it is 15 inches indepth in the vessel during operation. The weight of the liquid for a horizontal vessel is calculatedusing amore complicated formula than for a vertical vessel because of the nature of partial filling forhorizontal vessels.

240 | Page

Page 253: Design Calc s Manual

Attachments/Loadings Tutorial

Packing Tab

The Packing tab is identical to the Liquid tab in function. This tab is only available for vertical vessels.

241 | Page

Page 254: Design Calc s Manual

242 | Page

SEISMIC METHODOLOGY :  ASCE 7-98 AND

FORWARD

Inputs:

ASCE 7-98

1. Decide if the seismic calculation needs to be performed treating the vessel as a Non-Building Structure(Self Supporting), Non-Building Structure (Supported by another Structure), or as a Non-StructuralComponent. Use paragraphs 9.6.1, 9.6.3.9 and 9.14.4.1 for guidance.

2. Determine the short period spectral response acceleration, SS, from Figures 9.4.1.1(a) – (j). As analternative, mapped values are provided at http://earthquake.usgs.gov/designmaps. 1

3. Determine the 1 second spectral response acceleration, S1, from Figures 9.4.1.1(a) – (j). As analternative, mapped values are provided at http://earthquake.usgs.gov/designmaps. 2

4. Determine the Occupancy Category per Table 1-1 and then the Seismic UseGroup per Paragraph9.1.3; the Seismic UseGroup is used only for reference. 3

5. Determine the Site Class per Paragraph 9.4.1.2 and Table 9.4.1.2. 4

6. Determine the ResponseModification Factor from Table 9.14.2.1 (appearing as R) or Table 9.6.3.2(appearing as Rp) as applicable. Table 9.14.2.1 is used for Non-Building Structures (Self Supporting)and Table 9.6.3.2 is used for Non-Building Structures (Supported by another Structure) and for Non-Structural Components. 5

7. Determine the Component Amplification Factor from Table 9.6.3.2, ap. This value is only used for Non-Building Structures (Supported by another Structure) and for Non-Structural Components. 6

8. Determine if any of the conditions in Par. 9.6.1.5 mandate Ip to use 1.5. This value is only used forNon-Building Structures (Supported by another Structure) and for Non-Structural Components. 7

9. Determine the overstrength factor or forcemultiplier to be used on the anchor design, per table9.14.2.1. If you wish to not increase the force for the anchor design, set the value to 1. 8

IBC 2000

1. Decide if the seismic calculation needs to be performed treating the vessel as a Non-Building Structure(Self Supporting), Non-Building Structure (Supported by another Structure), or as a Non-StructuralComponent. Use IBC 2000 paragraphs 1621.1 and 1622.1 for guidance.

2. Determine the short period spectral response acceleration, SS, from Figures 1615(1) – (10). As analternative, mapped values are provided at http://earthquake.usgs.gov/designmaps. 9

3. Determine the 1 second spectral response acceleration, S1, from Figures 1615(1) – (10). As analternative, mapped values are provided at http://earthquake.usgs.gov/designmaps. 10

4. Determine the Occupancy Category per Table 1604.5 and then the Seismic UseGroup per Paragraph1616.2; the Seismic UseGroup is used only for reference. 11

Page 255: Design Calc s Manual

Seismic Methodology: ASCE 7-98 and Forward

5. Determine the Site Class per 1615.1.1. 12

6. Determine the ResponseModification Factor from Table 1622.2.5(1).

7. Determine the ResponseModification Factor from Table 1622.2.5(1) (appearing as R) or Table 1621.3(appearing as Rp) as applicable. Table 1622.2.5(1) is used for Non-Building Structures (SelfSupporting) and Table 1621.3 is used for Non-Building Structures (Supported by another Structure) andfor Non-Structural Components. 13

8. Determine the Component Amplification Factor from Table 1621.3, ap. This value is only used for Non-Building Structures (Supported by another Structure) and for Non-Structural Components. 14

9. Determine if any of the conditions in Par. 1621.1.6mandate Ip to use 1.5. This value is only used forNon-Building Structures (Supported by another Structure) and for Non-Structural Components. 15

10. Determine the overstrength factor or forcemultiplier to be used on the anchor design, per table1622.2.5(1). If you wish to not increase the force for the anchor design, set the value to 1. 16

ASCE 7-02 and IBC 2003

Note: IBC 2003 accepts the use of ASCE 7 for seismic design in paragraph 1614.1exception 1 on page 302. ASCE 7-02 is picked due to the relative publication dates ofthe two documents even though IBC 2003 does not explicitly pick the 2002 release ofASCE 7.

1. Decide if the seismic calculation needs to be performed treating the vessel as a Non-Building Structure(Self Supporting), Non-Building Structure (Supported by another Structure), or as a Non-StructuralComponent. Use ASCE 7-02 paragraphs 9.6.1 and 9.14.4 and 9.14.4.1 for guidance.

2. Determine the short period spectral response acceleration, SS, from Figures 9.4.1.1(a) – (j) for ASCE 7-02 and Figures 1615(1) through 1615(10) for IBC 2003. As an alternative, mapped values are providedat http://earthquake.usgs.gov/designmaps. 17

3. Determine the 1 second spectral response acceleration, S1, from Figures 9.4.1.1(a) – (j) for ASCE 7-02and Figures 1615(1) through 1615(10) for IBC 2003. As an alternative, mapped values are provided athttp://earthquake.usgs.gov/designmaps. 18

4. Determine the Occupancy Category per ASCE 7-02 Table 1-1 and then the Seismic UseGroup perASCE 7-02 Table 9.14.5.1.2; the Seismic UseGroup is used only for reference. 19 20

5. Determine the Site Class per ASCE 7-02 9.4.1.2. 21

6. Determine the ResponseModification Factor from ASCE 7-02 Table 9.14.5.1.1 (appearing as R) orTable 9.6.3.2 (appearing as Rp) as applicable. Table 9.14.5.1.1 is used for Non-Building Structures(Self Supporting) and Table 9.6.3.2 is used for Non-Building Structures (Supported by anotherStructure) and for Non-Structural Components. 22

7. Determine the Component Amplification Factor from ASCE 7-02 Table 9.6.3.2, ap. This value is onlyused for Non-Building Structures (Supported by another Structure) and for Non-StructuralComponents. 23

243 | Page

Page 256: Design Calc s Manual

Seismic Methodology: ASCE 7-98 and Forward

8. Determine if any of the conditions in ASCE 7-02 Par. 9.6.1.5 mandate Ip to use 1.5. This value is onlyused for Non-Building Structures (Supported by another Structure) and for Non-StructuralComponents. 24

9. Determine the overstrength factor or forcemultiplier to be used on the anchor design, per ASCE 7-02table 9.14.5.1.1. Please also review paragraph 9.14.7.3.3. If you wish to not increase the force for theanchor design, set the value to 1. 25

ASCE 7-05 and IBC 2006 and IBC 2009 and CBC 2010

Note: IBC 2006 defers to ASCE 7 for seismic design in both paragraphs 1602.1 onpage 278 and 1613.1 on page 302. IBC 2009 defers to ASCE 7 for seismic design inboth paragraphs 1602.1 and 1613.1. CBC 2010 defers to ASCE 7 for seismic design inboth paragraphs 1602.1 on page 6 of volume II and 1613.1 on page 42 in volume 2.ASCE 7-05 is picked due to the relative publication date of ASCE 7-05 to these threeother standards even though IBC 2006, IBC 2009, and CBC 2010 do not explicitly pickthe 2005 release of ASCE 7.

1. Decide if the seismic calculation needs to be performed treating the vessel as a Non-Building Structure(Self Supporting), Non-Building Structure (Supported by another Structure), or as a Non-StructuralComponent. Use ASCE 7-05 paragraphs 13.1.5 and 15.1.1 and 15.3 for guidance.

2. Determine the short period spectral response acceleration, SS, from Figures 22-1 through 22-14 forASCE 7-05 and Figures 1613.5(1) through 1613.5(14) for IBC 2006 and 2009. As an alternative,mapped values are provided at http://earthquake.usgs.gov/designmaps. 26

3. Determine the 1 second spectral response acceleration, S1, from Figures 22-1 through 22-14 for ASCE7-05 and Figures 1613.5(1) through 1613.5(14) for IBC 2006 and 2009. As an alternative, mappedvalues are provided at http://earthquake.usgs.gov/designmaps. 27

4. Determine the Occupancy Category per Table 1-1 for ASCE 7-05 and Table 1604.5 for IBC 2006 and2009. 28

5. Determine the Site Class per Section 11.4.2 and chapter 20 for ASCE 7-05 and Sections 1613.5.2 and1613.5.5 for IBC 2006 and 2009.

6. Determine the ResponseModification Factor from ASCE 7-05 Table 15.4-2 (appearing as R) or Table13.6-1 (appearing as Rp) as applicable. Table 15.4-2 is used for Non-Building Structures (SelfSupporting) and Table 13.6-1 is used for Non-Building Structures (Supported by another Structure) andfor Non-Structural Components. 29

7. Determine the Component Amplification Factor from ASCE 7-05 Table 13.6-1, ap, with additionalguidance from 15.3. This value is only used for Non-Building Structures (Supported by anotherStructure) and for Non-Structural Components. 30

8. Determine the long period transition period, TL, from ASCE 7-05 Figures 22-15 through 22-20. This isonly for Non-Building Structures (Self Supported). 31

244 | Page

Page 257: Design Calc s Manual

Seismic Methodology: ASCE 7-98 and Forward

9. Determine if any of the conditions in ASCE 7-05 Par. 13.1.3 apply. This step only needs to beperformed for Non-Building Structures (Supported by another Structure) and for Non-StructuralComponents. 32

10. Determine the overstrength factor or forcemultiplier to be used on the anchor design, per table 15.4-2.Please also review paragraph 15.7.3. If you wish to not increase the force for the anchor design, set thevalue to 1. 33

ASCE 7-10 and IBC 2012

Note: IBC 2012 defers to ASCE 7 for seismic design in both paragraphs 1602.1 onpage 333 and 1613.1 on page 366. ASCE 7-10 is picked due to the relative publicationdates of the two documents even though IBC 2012 does not explicitly pick the 2010release of ASCE 7.

1. Decide if the seismic calculation needs to be performed treating the vessel as a Non-Building Structure(Self Supporting), Non-Building Structure (Supported by another Structure), or as a Non-StructuralComponent. Use ASCE 7-10 paragraphs 13.1.5 and 15.1.1 and 15.3 for guidance.

2. Determine the short period spectral response acceleration, SS, from Figures 22-1 through 22-6 forASCE 7-10 and Figures 1613.3.1(1) through 1613.3.1(6) for IBC 2012. As an alternative, mappedvalues are provided at http://earthquake.usgs.gov/designmaps. 34

3. Determine the 1 second spectral response acceleration, S1, from Figures 22-1 through 22-6 for ASCE7-10 and Figures 1613.3.1(1) through 1613.3.1(6) for IBC 2012. As an alternative, mapped values areprovided at http://earthquake.usgs.gov/designmaps. 35

4. Determine the Risk Category per Table 1.5-1 for ASCE 7-10 and Table 1604.5 for IBC 2012. 36

5. Determine the Site Class per Section 11.4.2 and chapter 20 for ASCE 7-10.

6. Determine the ResponseModification Factor from ASCE 7-10 Table 15.4-2 (appearing as R) or Table13.6-1 (appearing as Rp) as applicable. Table 15.4-2 is used for Non-Building Structures (SelfSupporting) and Table 13.6-1 is used for Non-Building Structures (Supported by another Structure) andfor Non-Structural Components. 37

7. Determine the Component Amplification Factor from ASCE 7-10 Table 13.6-1, ap, with additionalguidance from 15.3. This value is only used for Non-Building Structures (Supported by anotherStructure) and for Non-Structural Components . 38

8. Determine the long period transition period, TL, from ASCE 7-10 Figures 22-12 through 22-16. This isonly for Non-Building Structures (Self Supported). 39

9. Determine if any of the conditions in ASCE 7-10 Par. 13.1.3 apply. This step only needs to beperformed for Non-Building Structures (Supported by another Structure) and for Non-StructuralComponents. 40

10. Determine the overstrength factor or forcemultiplier to be used on the anchor design, per table 15.4-2.Please also review paragraph 15.7.3. If you wish to not increase the force for the anchor design, set thevalue to 1. 41

245 | Page

Page 258: Design Calc s Manual

Seismic Methodology: ASCE 7-98 and Forward

Math1. Determine the site coefficient Fa from the table below:

Site ClassMapped Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods

Ss ≤ 0.25 Ss = 0.5 Ss = 0.75 Ss = 1.00 Ss ≥ 1.25A 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8

B 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

C 1.2 1.2 1.1 1.0 1.0

D 1.6 1.4 1.2 1.1 1.0

E 2.5 1.7 1.2 0.9 0.9

F NC NC NC NC NC

Table 1: Values of Site Coefficient Fa 42

Note: If the Site Class is F, Fa is determined by the designer. If the Site Class is E andSS > 1.00, Fa is determined by the designer for ASCE 7-98 and IBC 2000.

2. Determine the site coefficient Fv from the table below:

Site ClassMapped Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods

S1 ≤ 0.1 S1 = 0.2 S1 = 0.3 S1 = 0.4 S1 ≥ 0.5A 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8

B 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

C 1.7 1.6 1.5 1.4 1.3

D 2.4 2.0 1.8 1.6 1.5

E 3.5 3.2 2.8 2.4 2.4

F NC NC NC NC NC

Table 2: Values of Site Coefficient Fv 43

Note: If the Site Class is F, Fv is determined by the designer. If the Site Class is E andS1 > 0.4, Fv is determined by the designer for ASCE 7-98 and IBC 2000.

3. Calculate themaximum short period spectral response factor, SMS:44

S F S=MS a S (1)

4. Calculate themaximum 1 second spectral response factor, SM1:45

S F S=M V1 1 (2)

5. Calculate the design short period spectral response factor, SDS:46

S S=DS MS

2

3 (3)

246 | Page

Page 259: Design Calc s Manual

Seismic Methodology: ASCE 7-98 and Forward

6. Calculate the design 1 second spectral response factor, SD1:47

S S=D M1

2

31

(4)

7. Determine the Importance Factor, I:Non-Building Structures (Self Supported)

Seismic Use Group Occupancy/Risk Category I or IeI I or II 1.00

II III 1.25

III IV 1.50

Table 3: Occupancy Importance Factors 48

Non-Building Structures (Supported by another Structure), Non-Structural Component 49

ASCE 7-98: If any of the conditions in Par. 9.6.1.5mandate Ip to use 1.5: I=1.5

IBC 2000: If any of the conditions in Par. 1621.1.6mandate Ip to use 1.5: I=1.5

IBC 2003 or ASCE 7-02: If any of the conditions in ASCE 7-02 Par. 9.6.1.5mandate Ip touse 1.5: I=1.5

IBC 2006 or 2009 or 2012 or ASCE 7-05 or 7-10 or CBC 2010: If any of the conditions inASCE 7 Par. 13.1.3 apply: I=1.5

Otherwise: I=1.0

Note: I is used here for simplicity in the procedure. The references use Ip.

8. Determine the Seismic Design Category based on Short-Period Response Acceleration:

SDS

Seismic Use Group

I II III

Occupancy/Risk Category

I or II III IVSDS<0.167 A A A

0.167≤SDS<0.33 B B C

0.33≤SDS<0.50 C C D

0.50≤SDS D D D

Table 4: Occupancy Category per Short-Period Response Acceleration 50

247 | Page

Page 260: Design Calc s Manual

Seismic Methodology: ASCE 7-98 and Forward

9. Determine the Seismic Design Category based on 1-Second Period Response Acceleration:

SD1

Seismic Use Group

I II III

Occupancy/Risk Category

I or II III IVSD1<0.067 A A A

0.067≤SD1<0.133 B B C

0.133≤SD1<0.20 C C D

0.20≤SD1 D D D

Table 5: Occupancy Category per 1-Second Period Response Acceleration 51

10. Determine the Seismic Design Category: 52

If Occupancy/Risk Category is IV (or Seismic UseGroup is III) and S1 ≥ 0.75: F

If Occupancy/Risk Category is I, II, or III (or Seismic UseGroup is I or II) and S1 ≥ 0.75: E

Otherwise: Use worst result fromMath steps 8 and 9. The worst case is the letter later inthe alphabet.

11. Determine the height limitation:

If Code is ASCE 7-05 or ASCE 7-10 or Code is IBC 2006 or IBC 2009 or IBC 2012ANDLegs are used: 53

SupportSeismic Design Category

Din. (mm)

Ein. (mm)

Fin. (mm)

Braced Legs 1920 (48800) 1200 (30500) 1200 (30500)

Un-Braced Legs 1200 (30500) 720 (18300) 720 (18300)

Table 6: Height limitations for vertical vessels supported on legs

Otherwise: There is no height limitation.

12. Determine the following coefficient:

For Codes: ASCE 7-02, ASCE 7-05, ASCE 7-10, IBC 2003, IBC 2006, IBC 2009, IBC2012, CBC 2010. If the support is a skirt and theOccupancy/Risk Category is IV and theDesigner defines the vessel or support as sensitive to buckling failure: 54

248 | Page

Page 261: Design Calc s Manual

Seismic Methodology: ASCE 7-98 and Forward

C = 1R I− (5)

Otherwise:

C =R I

I

R−

(6)

13. Calculate theminimum seismic response coefficient for Non-Building Structures (Self Supported):ASCE 7-98

Seismic Design Category E or F 55

C S C= 0.5S R I−min 1 − (7)

Otherwise 56

C S I= 0.044S DS−min (8)ASCE 7-02, IBC 2000, IBC 2003

Seismic Design Category E or F 57

C S C= 0.8S R I−min 1 − (9)

Otherwise 58

C S I= 0.14S DS−min (10)ASCE 7-05 and ASCE 7-10, IBC 2006, IBC 2009, IBC 2012, and CBC 2010

Use 15.4.1 Step 2 Exception

If S1 < 0.6:59

C S I= max(0.044 , 0.01)S DS−min (11)

If S1 ≥ 0.6:60

C S C S I= max(0.5 , 0.044 , 0.01)S R I DS−min 1 − (12)

Do not use 15.4.1 Step 2 Exception

If S1 < 0.6:61

C S I= max(0.044 , 0.03)S DS−min (13)

If S1 ≥ 0.6:62

249 | Page

Page 262: Design Calc s Manual

Seismic Methodology: ASCE 7-98 and Forward

C S C S I= max(0.8 , 0.044 , 0.03)S R I DS−min 1 − (14)

14. Calculate theminimum seismic response coefficient for Non-Building Structures (Supported byanother Structure)OR Non-Structural Components: 63

C S C= 0.3S DS R I−min − (15)

Note: this is the combination of variables thatWp is calculated by in the referencedequation.

15. Calculate themaximum seismic response coefficient if T is known for Non-Building Structures (SelfSupported):

If Code is ASCE 7-98 or 7-02OR Code is IBC 2000 or 2003OR T ≤ TL:64

C C=S

S

TR I−max −

D1

(16)

Otherwise: 65

C C=S

S T

TR I−max −

D L1

2

(17)

16. Calculate themaximum seismic response coefficient for Non-Building Structures (Supported byanother Structure)OR Non-Structural Components: 66

C S C= 1.6S DS R I−max − (18)

Note: This is the combination of variables thatWp is calculated by in the referencedequation.

17. Calculate the seismic response coefficient for Non-Building Structures (Self Supported): 67

If T is known:

C C S C C= max[ , min( , )]S S DS R I S−min − −max (19)

Otherwise:

C C S C= max( , )S S DS R I−min − (20)

18. Calculate the seismic response coefficient for Non-Building Structures (Supported by anotherStructure)OR Non-Structural Components: 68

C C a S C C( )= max , min 1.2 ,S S p DS R I S−min − −max (21)

250 | Page

Page 263: Design Calc s Manual

Seismic Methodology: ASCE 7-98 and Forward

Note: This is the combination of variables thatWp is calculated by in the referencedequation. In addition, the 1.2 factor came from setting the z/h ratio to the limit of 1 asdescribed in the text (this is a conservative simplification).

19. Determine the total design lateral shear at the base of the structure:

If SDC = A 69

V W= 0.01 (22)

If for a Non-Building Structure (Self Supported) ANDT ≤ 0.06AND SDC ≠ A: 70

V S WI= 0.30 DS (23)

Otherwise (including if T is unknown): 71

V C W= S (24)

Note: The first equation appears as Fx in the references. Themethodology for Non-Building Structures supported by other Structures and Non-Structural componentsactually uses the symbol Fp instead of V here. V is used for simplicity and normalizationacross the different methods.

20. Calculate the height exponent: 72

If T is known:

k T= min[max(0.5 + 0.75, 1), 2] (25)

Otherwise:

k = 2 (26)

21. Determine the vertical distribution factor for x = 1 to n: 73

If SDC = A 74

C =vx

W

W∑

x

in

i=1 (27)

Note: This equation does not appear in the building codes. Its use simplifies thenormalization of the lateral force equation for SDC = A with the base shear andcomponent for equations.

251 | Page

Page 264: Design Calc s Manual

Seismic Methodology: ASCE 7-98 and Forward

Otherwise:

C =vx

W h

Wh∑

x x

k

in

i i

k

=1 (28)

22. Determine the vertical seismic load casemultiplier:ASCE 7-98 75

If SDC = AOR If SDS ≤ 0.125 and Designer chooses to ignore it, then

IgnoreVerticalEffect TRUE= (29)

If IgnoreVerticalEffect TRUE= :C = 0EV (30)

If Load Case is 3 and IgnoreVerticalEffect FALSE= :C = 0.7EV (31)

If Load Case is 5 and IgnoreVerticalEffect FALSE= :C = −0.7EV (32)

IBC 2000 76

If SDC = A:

IgnoreVerticalEffect TRUE= (33)

If IgnoreVerticalEffect TRUE= :C = 0EV (34)

If Load Case is Formula 16-10 and IgnoreVerticalEffect FALSE= :C = 0.7EV (35)

If Load Case is Formula 16-12 and IgnoreVerticalEffect FALSE= :C = −0.7EV (36)

ASCE 7-02, ASCE 7-05, ASCE 7-10, IBC 2003, IBC 2006, IBC 2009, IBC 2012, CBC 2010 77 78

252 | Page

Page 265: Design Calc s Manual

Seismic Methodology: ASCE 7-98 and Forward

If SDC = AOR If SDS ≤ 0.125 and Designer chooses to ignore itOR Load Case is 8 andDesigner chooses to ignore it for determining demands on the foundation:

IgnoreVerticalEffect TRUE= (37)

If IgnoreVerticalEffect TRUE= :C = 0EV (38)

If Load Case is 5 and IgnoreVerticalEffect FALSE= :C = 0.7EV (39)

If Load Case is 6 and IgnoreVerticalEffect FALSE= :C = 0.525EV (40)

If Load Case is 8 and IgnoreVerticalEffect FALSE= :C = −0.7EV (41)

23. Determine the horizontal seismic and dead load casemultipliers:ASCE 7-98 79

If Load Case is 3:

C = 0.7EH (42)C = 1De (43)

If Load Case is 5:

C = 0.7EH (44)C = 0.6De (45)

IBC 2000 80

If Load Case is Formula 16-10:

C = 0.7EH (46)C = 1De (47)

If Load Case is Formula 16-12:

253 | Page

Page 266: Design Calc s Manual

Seismic Methodology: ASCE 7-98 and Forward

C = 0.7EH (48)C = 0.6De (49)

ASCE 7-02, ASCE 7-05, ASCE 7-10, IBC 2003, IBC 2006, CBC 2010 81

If Load Case is 5:

C = 0.7EH (50)C = 1De (51)

If Load Case is 6:

C = 0.525EH (52)C = 1De (53)

If Load Case is 8:

C = 0.7EH (54)C = 0.6De (55)

24. Determine the lateral seismic force for x = 1 to n: 82

F C VC=x vx EH (56)

25. Adjust the weight to account for vertical acceleration and the dead loadmultiplier: 83

W W C S C= ( + 0.2 )De DS EV (57)

26. Adjust the static head to account for vertical acceleration and the dead loadmultiplier: 84

S H S H C S C. . = . .( + 0.2 )De DS EV (58)

27. Once the loads are determined on the vessel wall and its supports, the overstrength factor entered isthen used tomultiply the calculated force on the anchor bolts as applicable.

References

1ASCE 7-98, Par. 9.4.1.1, pg. 98

2ASCE 7-98, Par. 9.4.1.1, pg. 98

3ASCE 7-98, Par. 9.1.3, pg. 98

4ASCE 7-98, Par. 9.4.1.2, pg. 98; ASCE 7-98, Table 9.4.1.2, pg. 118

254 | Page

Page 267: Design Calc s Manual

Seismic Methodology: ASCE 7-98 and Forward

5ASCE 7-98, Table 9.14.2.1, pgs 177 and 178; ASCE 7-98, 9.6.1.2, pg. 148

6ASCE 7-98, 9.6.1.2, pg. 148

7ASCE 7-98, Par. 9.6.1.5, pg. 149

8ASCE 7-98, Table 9.14.2.1, pg. 177

9IBC 2000, Par. 1615.1, pg. 331

10IBC 2000, Par. 1615.1, pg. 331

11IBC 2000, Par. 1616.2, pg. 354

12IBC 2000, Par. 1615.1.1, pg. 350

13IBC 2000, Par. 1621.1.4, pg. 376; IBC 2000, Par. 1622.2.5 Step 1, pg. 387

14IBC 2000, Par. 1621.1.4, pg. 376

15IBC 2000, Par. 1621.1.6, pg. 377

16IBC 2000, Par. 1622.2.5, pg. 387

17ASCE 7-02, 9.4.1.2.4, pg. 129; IBC 2003, Par. 1615.1, pg. 303

18ASCE 7-02, 9.4.1.2.4, pg. 129; IBC 2003, Par. 1615.1, pg. 303

19ASCE 7-02, Table 1-1, pg. 4

20ASCE 7-02, Table 9.14.5.1.2, pg. 192

255 | Page

Page 268: Design Calc s Manual

Seismic Methodology: ASCE 7-98 and Forward

21ASCE 7-02, Par. 9.4.1.2, pg. 107

22ASCE 7-02, Par. 9.14.5.1 Step 1, pg. 188; ASCE 7-02, Par. 9.6.1.3, pg. 159

23ASCE 7-02, Par. 9.6.1.3, pg. 159

24ASCE 7-02, Par. 9.6.1.5, pg. 160

25ASCE 7-02, Par. 9.14.5.1 Steps 1 and 3, pg. 188; ASCE 7-02, Par. 9.14.7.3.3, pg. 195

26ASCE 7-05, 11.4.1, pg. 115 ; IBC 2006, 1613.5.1, pg. 303; IBC 2009, 1613.5.1

27ASCE 7-05, 11.4.1, pg. 115 ; IBC 2006, 1613.5.1, pg. 303; IBC 2009, 1613.5.1

28ASCE 7-05, Table 1-1, pg. 3 ; IBC 2006, Table 1604.5, pg. 281; IBC 2009, Table 1604.5

29ASCE 7-05, Par. 13.3.1, pg. 144; ASCE 7-05, 15.3 , pg. 161; ASCE 7-05, 15.4.1 Step (1)(b), pg.162

30ASCE 7-05, Par. 13.3.1, pg. 144; ASCE 7-05, 15.3 , pg. 161

31ASCE 7-05, 11.4.5, pg. 116

32ASCE 7-05, Par. 13.1.3, pg. 143

33ASCE 7-05, Par. 15.4.1 Step 1(b), pg. 162; ASCE 7-05, Par. 15.7.3(a), pg. 167

34ASCE 7-10, 11.4.1, pg. 65; IBC 2012, 1613.3.3, pgs 366 and 367

35ASCE 7-10, 11.4.1, pg. 65; IBC 2012, 1613.3.3, pgs 366 and 367

36ASCE 7-10, Table 1.5-1, pg. 2; IBC 2012, Table 1604.5, pg. 336

256 | Page

Page 269: Design Calc s Manual

Seismic Methodology: ASCE 7-98 and Forward

37ASCE 7-10, Par. 13.3.1, pg. 114; ASCE 7-10, 15.3 , pg. 139; ASCE 7-10, 15.4.1 Step (1)(b), pg.140

38ASCE 7-10, Par. 13.3.1, pg. 113; ASCE 7-10, 15.3 , pg. 139

39ASCE 7-10, 11.4.5, pg. 67

40ASCE 7-10, Par. 13.1.3, pg. 111

41ASCE 7-10, Par. 15.4.1 Step 1(b), pg. 140; ASCE 7-10, Par. 15.7.3(a), pg. 150

42ASCE 7-98, Table 9.4.1.2.4a, pg. 119; ASCE 7-02, Table 9.4.1.2.4a, pg. 129; ASCE 7-05, Table11.4-1, pg. 115; ASCE 7-10, Table 11.4-1, pg. 66; IBC 2000, Table 1615.1.2(1), pg. 351; IBC 2006,Table 1613.5.3(1), pg. 304

43ASCE 7-98, Table 9.4.1.2.4b, pg. 120; ASCE 7-02, Table 9.4.1.2.4b, pg. 130; ASCE 7-05, Table11.4-2, pg. 115; ASCE 7-10, Table 11.4.2, pg. 66; IBC 2000, Table 1615.1.2(2), pg. 351; IBC 2006,Table 1613.5.3(2), pg. 304

44ASCE 7-98, Eq. 9.4.1.2.4-1, pg. 119; ASCE 7-02, Eq. 9.4.1.2.4-1, pg. 129; ASCE 7-05, Eq. 11.4-1, pg. 115; ASCE 7-10, Eq. 11.4-1, pg. 65; IBC 2000, Eq. 16-16, pg. 350; IBC 2006, Eq. 16-37, pg.303

45ASCE 7-98, Eq. 9.4.1.2.4-2, pg. 119; ASCE 7-02, Eq. 9.4.1.2.4-2, pg. 129; ASCE 7-05, Eq. 11.4-2, pg. 115; ASCE 7-10, Eq. 11.4-2, pg. 65; IBC 2000, Eq. 16-17, pg. 350; IBC 2006, Eq. 16-38, pg.303

46ASCE 7-98, Eq. 9.4.1.2.5-1, pg. 119; ASCE 7-02, Eq. 9.4.1.2.5-1, pg. 129; ASCE 7-05, Eq. 11.4-3, pg. 115; ASCE 7-10, Eq. 11.4-3, pg. 65; IBC 2000, Eq. 16-18, pg. 350; IBC 2006, Eq. 16-39, pg.304

47ASCE 7-98, Eq. 9.4.1.2.5-2, pg. 119; ASCE 7-02, Eq. 9.4.1.2.5-2, pg. 129; ASCE 7-05, Eq. 11.4-4, pg. 115; ASCE 7-10, Eq. 11.4-4, pg. 65; IBC 2000, Eq. 16-19, pg. 350; IBC 2006, Eq. 16-40, pg.304

257 | Page

Page 270: Design Calc s Manual

Seismic Methodology: ASCE 7-98 and Forward

48ASCE 7-98, Table 9.1.4, pg. 87; ASCE 7-02, Table 9.1.4, pg. 97; ASCE 7-05, Table 11.5-1, pg.116; ASCE 7-10, Table 1.5-2, pg. 5; IBC 2000, Table 1622.2.5(2), pg. 389

49ASCE 7-02, Par. 9.6.1.5, pg. 160; ASCE 7-05, Par. 13.1.3, pg. 143; ASCE 7-10, Par. 13.1.3, pg.111; IBC 2000, Par. 1621.1.6, pg. 377

50ASCE 7-98, Table 9.4.2.1a, pg. 122; ASCE 7-02, Table 9.4.2.1a, pg. 131; ASCE 7-05, Table11.6-1, pg. 116; ASCE 7-10, Table 11.6-1, pg. 67; IBC 2000, Table 1616.3(1), pg. 354; IBC 2006,Table 1613.5.6(1), pg. 306

51ASCE 7-98, Table 9.4.2.1b, pg. 122; ASCE 7-02, Table 9.4.2.1b, pg. 132; ASCE 7-05, Table11.6-2, pg. 116; ASCE 7-10, Table 11.6-2, pg. 67; IBC 2000, Table 1616.3(2), pg. 355; IBC 2006,Table 1613.5.6(2), pg. 306

52ASCE 7-98, Par. 9.4.2, pgs 121 and 122; ASCE 7-98, Note a, pg. 122; ASCE 7-02, Par. 9.4.2.1,pg. 131; ASCE 7-02, Note a, pgs 131 and 132; ASCE 7-05, Par. 11.6, pg. 116; ASCE 7-10, Par.11.6, pg. 67; IBC 2000, Par. 1616.3, pg. 354; IBC 2000, Note a, pgs 354 and 355; IBC 2006, Par.1613.5.6, pg. 306

53ASCE 7-05, Table 15.4-2, pg. 163; ASCE 7-10, Table 15.4-2, pg. 142

54ASCE 7-02, Par. 9.14.7.3.11.7 (un-marked note at end), pg. 204; ASCE 7-05, Par. 15.7.11.7 (un-marked note at end), pg. 173; ASCE 7-10, Par. 15.7.10.5, pg. 157

55ASCE 7-98, Eq. 9.5.3.2.1-4, pg. 136

56ASCE 7-98, Eq. 9.5.3.2.1-3, pg. 136

57ASCE 7-02, Eq. 9.14.5.1-2, pg. 188; ASCE 7-02, Eq. 9.5.5.2.1-4, pg. 146; IBC 2000, Eq. 16-76,pg. 387; IBC 2000, Eq. 16-38, pg. 360

58ASCE 7-02, Eq. 9.14.5.1-1, pg. 188; ASCE 7-02, Eq. 9.5.5.2.1-3, pg. 146; IBC 2000, Eq. 16-75,pg. 387; IBC 2000, Eq. 16-37, pg. 360

258 | Page

Page 271: Design Calc s Manual

Seismic Methodology: ASCE 7-98 and Forward

59ASCE 7-05, Eq. 15.4-3, pg. 162; ASCE 7-05, Eq. 12.8-5, pg. 129; ASCE 7-05 Supplement 2;ASCE 7-10, Eq. 15.4-3, pg. 144; ASCE 7-10, Eq. 12.8-5, pg. 90

60ASCE 7-05, Eq. 15.4-4, pg. 162; ASCE 7-05, Eq. 12.8-6, pg. 129; ASCE 7-05 Supplement 2;ASCE 7-10, Eq. 15.4-4, pg. 144; ASCE 7-10, Eq. 12.8-6, pg. 90

61ASCE 7-05, Eq. 15.4-1, pg. 162; ASCE 7-05, Eq. 12.8-5, pg. 129; ASCE 7-05 Supplement 2;ASCE 7-10, Eq. 15.4-1, pg. 144

62ASCE 7-05, Eq. 15.4-2, pg. 162; ASCE 7-05, Eq. 12.8-6, pg. 129; ASCE 7-05 Supplement 2;ASCE 7-10, Eq. 15.4-2, pg. 144

63ASCE 7-98, Eq. 9.6.1.3-3; pg. 148; ASCE 7-02, Eq. 9.6.1.3-3; pg. 159; ASCE 7-05, Eq. 13.3-3,pg. 144; ASCE 7-10, Eq. 13.3-3, pg. 113; IBC 2000, Eq. 16-69, pg. 376

64ASCE 7-98, Eq. 9.5.3.2.1-2, pg. 136; ASCE 7-02, Eq. 9.5.5.2.1-2, pg. 146; ASCE 7-05, Eq. 12.8-3, pg. 129; ASCE 7-10, Eq. 12.8-3, pg. 89; IBC 2000, Eq. 16-36, pg. 360

65ASCE 7-05, Eq. 12.8-4, pg. 129; ASCE 7-10, Eq. 12.8-4, pg. 89

66ASCE 7-98, Eq. 9.6.1.3-2, pg. 148; ASCE 7-02, Eq. 9.6.1.3-2, pg. 159; ASCE 7-02, Eq. 13.3-2,pg. 144; ASCE 7-10, Eq. 13.3-2, pg. 113; IBC 2000, Eq. 9.6.1.3-2, pg. 159

67ASCE 7-98, Par. 9.5.3.2.1, pg. 136; ASCE 7-02, Par. 9.5.5.2.1, pg. 146; ASCE 7-05, Par.12.8.1.1, pg. 129; ASCE 7-10, Par. 12.8.1.1, pg. 89; IBC 2000, Par. 1617.4.1.1, pg. 360

68ASCE 7-98, Par. 9.6.1.3, pg. 148; ASCE 7-02, Par. 9.6.1.3, pg. 159; ASCE 7-05, Par. 13.3.1, pg.144; ASCE 7-10, Par. 13.3.1, pg. 113;IBC 2000, Par. 1621.1.4, pg. 376

69ASCE 7-98, Par. 9.5.2.5.1, pg. 130; ASCE 7-02; ASCE 7-05, Par. 11.7 pgs. 116-117; ASCE 7-10, Par. 11.7, pg. 68 ; IBC 2000, Par. 1616.4.1, pg. 355

259 | Page

Page 272: Design Calc s Manual

Seismic Methodology: ASCE 7-98 and Forward

70ASCE 7-98, Eq. 9.14.2.2, pg. 175; ASCE 7-02, Eq. 9.14.5.2, pg. 192; ASCE 7-05, Eq. 15.4-5, pg.164; ASCE 7-10, Eq. 15.4-5, pg. 144; IBC 2000, Eq. 16-77, pg. 389

71ASCE 7-98, Eq. 9.5.3.2-1, pg. 136; ASCE 7-02, Eq. 9.5.5.2-1, pg. 146; ASCE 7-05, Eq. 12.8-1,pg. 129; ASCE 7-10, Eq. 12.8-1, pg. 89; ASCE 7-10, Par. 13.3.1, pg. 113; IBC 2000, Eq. 16-34, pg.360

72ASCE 7-98, Par. 9.5.3.4, pg. 137; ASCE 7-02, Par. 9.14.5.1 step 6(a); ASCE 7-02, Par. 9.5.5.4;pg. 148; ASCE 7-05, Par. 15.4.1 step 4(a), pg. 163; ASCE 7-05, Par. 12.8.3, pg. 130; ASCE 7-10,Par. 13.3.1, pg. 113; ASCE 7-10, Par. 15.4.1 step 4(a), pg. 144; ASCE 7-10, Par. 12.8.3, pg. 91;IBC 2000, Par. 1617.4.3, pg. 361

73ASCE 7-98, Eq. 9.5.3.4-2, pg. 137; ASCE 7-02, Par. 9.14.5.1 step 6(a); ASCE 7-02, Eq. 9.5.5.4-2; pg. 148; ASCE 7-05, Par. 15.4.1 step 4(a), pg. 163; ASCE 7-05, Eq. 12.8-12, pg. 130; ASCE 7-10, Par. 13.3.1, pg. 113; ASCE 7-10, Par. 15.4.1 step 4(a), pg. 144; ASCE 7-10, Eq. 12.8-12, pg.91; IBC 2000, Par. 1622.2.5 step 6, pg. 387; IBC 2000, Eq. 16-42, pg. 361

74ASCE 7-98, Par. 9.5.2.5.1, pg. 130; ASCE 7-02; ASCE 7-05, Par. 11.7 pgs. 116-117; ASCE 7-10, Par. 11.7, pg. 68 ; IBC 2000, Par. 1616.4.1, pg. 355

75ASCE 7-98, Par. 9.5.2.5.1, pg. 130; ASCE 7-98, Par. 9.5.2.7, pgs 134 and 135; ASCE 7-98, Par.2.4.1, pg. 5

76IBC 2000, Par. 1616.4.1, pg. 355; IBC 2000, Par. 1605.3.1, pg. 298

77ASCE 7-02, Par. 2.4.1, pg. 6; ASCE 7-02, Table 9.5.2.5.1, pg. 140; ASCE 7-02, Par. 9.5.3, pg.145; ASCE 7-05, Par. 2.4.1, pg. 5; ASCE 7-05, Par. 11.7, pgs 116 – 117; ASCE 7-05, Par. 12.4.3,pg. 127 ASCE 7-10, Par. 2.4.1, pg. 8; ASCE 7-10, Par. 11.7, pg. 68; ASCE 7-10, Par. 12.4.3, pgs86 - 87

78ASCE 7-02, Par. 9.5.2.7, pg. 144; ASCE 7-05, Par 12.4.2.2 Notes 1 and 2, pg. 126; ASCE 7-10,Par. 12.4.2.2, pg. 86

260 | Page

Page 273: Design Calc s Manual

Seismic Methodology: ASCE 7-98 and Forward

79ASCE 7-98, Par. 9.5.2.5.1, pg. 130; ASCE 7-98, Par. 9.5.2.7, pgs 134 and 135; ASCE 7-98, Par.2.4.1, pg. 5

80IBC 2000, Par. 1616.4.1, pg. 355; IBC 2000, Par. 1605.3.1, pg. 298

81ASCE 7-02, Par. 2.4.1, pg. 6; ASCE 7-02, Table 9.5.2.5.1, pg. 140; ASCE 7-02, Par. 9.5.3, pg.145; ASCE 7-05, Par. 2.4.1, pg. 5; ASCE 7-05, Par. 11.7, pgs 116 – 117; ASCE 7-05, Par. 12.4.3,pg. 127 ASCE 7-10, Par. 2.4.1, pg. 8; ASCE 7-10, Par. 11.7, pg. 68; ASCE 7-10, Par. 12.4.3, pgs86 - 87

82ASCE 7-98, Eq. 9.5.3.4-2, pg. 137; ASCE 7-02, Par. 9.14.5.1 step 6(a), pg. 188; ASCE 7-02, Eq.9.5.5.4-1; pg. 148; ASCE 7-05, Par. 15.4.1 step 4(a), pg. 163; ASCE 7-05, Eq. 12.8-11, pg. 130;ASCE 7-10, Eq. 12.8-12, pg. 91; IBC 2000, Par. 1622.2.5 step 6, pg. 387; IBC 2000, Eq. 16-41, pg.361

83ASCE 7-98, Par. 9.5.2.7, pg. 134; ASCE 7-02, Par. 9.5.2.7, pg. 144; ASCE 7-05, Par.12.14.3.1.2, pg. 139; ASCE 7-10, Par. 12.14.3.1.2, pg. 104; IBC 2000, Par. 1617.1.2, pg 358

84ASCE 7-98, Par. 9.5.2.7, pg. 134; ASCE 7-02, Par. 9.5.2.7, pg. 144; ASCE 7-05, Par.12.14.3.1.2, pg. 139; ASCE 7-10, Par. 12.14.3.1.2, pg. 104; IBC 2000, Par. 1617.1.2, pg 358

261 | Page

Page 274: Design Calc s Manual

262 | Page

TOWER ANALYSIS METHODOLOGY

The tower analysis will consider the forces andmoments caused by a variety of factors: vesselmaterial, liquid, packing, insulation weight, wind and seismic loadings, attachment weights, bendingdue to eccentric attachments, and applied horizontal forces. The calculations are based on commonindustrymethods that have been proven, both in theory and practice. The tower analysis stress anddeflection calculations are based on static designmethods and are not adequate for tall verticalvessels that are subject to wind-induced vibration. These vesselsmust be designed tomeet staticrequirements and then be designed to withstand dynamic loading (wind-induced vibration) orredesigned to prevent it from occurring.

Tower Analysis Basics

Before you proceed with reviewing the tower analysis, check tomake sure your component order iscorrect onemore time (top head, shells-cones, bottom head, skirt, base plate). Also check tomakesure that your attachments, wind load diameters, liquid, insulation, and packing all match up with thecorrect elevations for the tower portions they are a part of. DesignCalcs will automatically perform atower analysis for you that incorporates all of these items. You will see the tower analysis in thereports. Note that the base plate calculationswill take information from the tower analysis; you cansee this in the base plate report. Below is a basic introduction to the way that the tower analysisworks.

Definitions

Section:A portion or length of the tower in which the general design parameters defined in SectionBoundaries are constant.

Section Boundaries:An elevation where a change occurs in one or more of the following:

n Section Type (e.g., head, cylindrical shell, conical section, skirt, etc.)n Design Pressuren Material Typen Inside Diametern Nominal Wall Thicknessn Corrosion Allowancen Insulation Thicknessn Insulation Densityn Liquid Density

Page 275: Design Calc s Manual

Tower Analysis Methodology

n Packing Densityn Wind Load Diametern Wind Pressuren Circumferential Weld Joint Efficiency

Segment:A section or a portion of a section used for calculation purposes.

Node:A node exists at the top and bottom of every segment. Nodes are placed at sectionboundaries and at attachment locations.

Methodology

The tower methodology is the work of a professional engineering firm contracted to provide thesecalculations to CEI. Themethod used relies onmany of today’s popular vessel manuals, includingAISC, Bednar, Megesy, andMoss. The calculations have been refined and perfected over time.

This section provides a basic outline of the steps and calculations that the tower analysis performs tocheck the skirt and vessel reactions for adequacy. They are provided here in a logical order reflectiveof the report andmathematics. These steps are performed for each calculation case of the toweranalysis (for example, Operating Pressurized Sustained Case and Empty UnpressurizedOccasional Loadings Seismic Case 5 are two different calculation cases).

1. Determine properties for the tower componentsa. Divide the vessel into sections and segmentsb. Look for cylinder lengths longer than 20% of the vessel total length and divide in half (repeat as

necessary)c. Calculate the weight of each segmentd. Calculate the First Natural Period of Vibration (FNPV) for the vessel per Rayleigh's Method

2. Determine wind loadinga. Calculating the wind pressure at themidpoint of each segment from the wind code chosen.b. Calculating the wind force on each segment.c. Calculating themoment at the bottom of each segment from the shear at the top of the segment

and the wind force on the segment.d. Calculating the bending stress at the bottom of each segment due to themoment at the bottom

of the segment.

3. Determine seismic loadinga. Calculating the total seismic shear force on the vessel based on the seismic code selected.b. Calculating the seismic shear distribution based on the seismic code selected.

263 | Page

Page 276: Design Calc s Manual

Tower Analysis Methodology

c. Calculating themoment at the bottom of each segment from the shear at the top of the segmentand the seismic shear on the segment.

d. Calculating the bending stress at the bottom of each segment due to themoment at the bottomof the segment.

4. Determine sustained loadingsa. Calculating the stress in each segment due to internal pressure.b. Calculating the stress in each segment due to external pressure.c. Calculating the stress at the bottom of each segment due to weight.

5. Perform stress superpositiona. Calculating themaximum tensile stress in each segment as follows:b. Calculating themaximum compressive stress in each segment as:c. Calculating the allowable tensile stress for each segment as the Section II, D allowable tensile

stress multiplied by the girth seam efficiency.d. Calculating the allowable compressive stress for each segment per UG-23(b) from Section VIII,

Division 1e. Calculating the critical buckling stress for each segment per engineering firms

recommendations. This is nearly always redundant with compressive stress.

6. Compare stresses: If themaximum tensile stress is less than the allowable tensile stress for eachsegment and themaximum compressive stress less than the smaller of the allowable compressivestress or the critical buckling stress, the tower design is acceptable.

Review

The calculated stresses are divided by the allowable stresses to determine stress ratios that allow foramuchmore rapid review process. The stress ratiosmust be less than or equal to 1 for all cases fora design to be passing. In addition, ratios greater than 1 are bolded to stand out in the report.

264 | Page

Page 277: Design Calc s Manual

265 | Page

SETTING THE CODE YEAR FOR A VESSEL

The code year for a vessel can be set in the vessel information. The "Code" field appears on theGeneral tab when you select Vessel > Vessel Information on the Components panel. Select thecorrect code, then click Save or Save and Close to apply your changes to the vessel. This screenalso appears when you create a new vessel.

Page 278: Design Calc s Manual

266 | Page

CHANGING THE SUPPORT DATA PATH

To change the support data path in DesignCalcs, click the Tools button on themain toolbar andselect Change Support Path from themenu. Click the Browse button to navigate to the folder thatcontains the support data file. If a folder with no support data is selected, the programwill inform youof this fact. You can click the Browse button again to select a new folder or you can close the SupportPath dialog without changing the data path.

Once the appropriate folder has been selected, clickOK to apply the change. You will be informedthat DesignCalcsmust close to accept the changes. ClickOK and the programwill close. The nexttime you run the program, the support path you selected will be active.

Page 279: Design Calc s Manual

267 | Page

THE CEI PORTAL

This article will familiarize you with CEI's software update portal. The portal provides notifications ofupcoming expirations andmakes downloading updates quick and easy.

The software portal is installed with your CEI software. It runsminimized in the taskbar and regularlychecks for updates. When an update for your installed software is available, the portal providesnotification. Downloading the update is as simple as clicking the link in the portal interface. Releasenotes that detail the content of each update are also available.

The Software Update view displays the status of your installed CEI products. You will be able to seewhich products need updating: the Portal displayswhich version you have installed and themostrecent version available. Updates and release notes can be accessed by clicking the links in thePortal.

If you have purchased a new license or have updated your subscription, you can check for your newlicense by clicking the “Check for License Updates” button. This will look for any new licenses onCEI’s license server and automatically apply them to your key.

Details about your CEI software licenses can also be accessed through the portal. On the SoftwareLicense view, you can see which licenses are expired and how much time you have left on theothers. The portal will notify you of upcoming expirations. You can choose to not be reminded untilafter a certain date by selecting the checkbox on the bar near the bottom that says "Don't remindme..." and entering a date. The software portal will not send any reminders until after the dateentered even if licenses expire during this period. To ensure uninterrupted productivity, werecommend that you do not turn off the portal reminders.

Page 280: Design Calc s Manual

The CEI Portal

The software portal makes updating and licensing your software simple and straightforward. If youdo have difficulty, you can use the portal to contact CEI through our online chat. Occasionally wemay ask that you send us a specific license file - the portal alsomakes this easy. Click the "EmailC2V License Files to CEI" button or the “Upload C2V License Files to CEI” button and you're done.

268 | Page

Page 281: Design Calc s Manual

269 | Page

L ICENSE TROUBLESHOOTING

Our flexible licensingmodel increases the benefits of our software. Because the license can beplaced anywhere on a network, the software can be used by those who need it on any computer inthe network. Occasional issues do appear, however, so this article aims to walk you through thoseissues and their solutions.

Software is running in Demo mode

Check to be sure that your subscription has not expired. Access theCEI Portal and click onMySoftware Licenses. Green flags indicate current licenses, yellow flags indicate licenses that willexpire soon, and red flags indicate licenses that have expired. If your license has expired, youmayclick the link at the bottom of the Portal and visit the CEI online store, or youmay email our salesdepartment to purchase a new license.

Only part of the software is available/working

If your company has an unequal number of licenses to certain modules, some usersmay findthemselves operating in a partial demomode. For example, if you have two licenses for DesignCalcsBasic but only one license for the Skirt Module, the first user to launch the programwill use a licensefor DesignCalcs Basic and the license for the Skirt Module. The second user will only have access tothe DesignCalcs Basic license, so the Skirt Module will operate in Demomode.

To remedy this situation, both users should exit the program and the user that needs the SkirtModule license should then launch the software first.

Software was working when launched but is now in Demomode/not working

Check theCEI Portal to make sure your subscription has not expired. If your license is still valid, itmay have timed out. If the software is launched but not used for an extended period of time, thelicense will be released back to the key so othersmay access it. Close and reopen the software toobtain another license from the key.

Page 282: Design Calc s Manual

License Troubleshooting

License key is plugged in locally but no licenses are visible

If your license key is plugged into your physical machine and no licenses are visible in the CEI Portal,youmay need to install the HASP™ drivers. Click the link below and save the file.

ftp://ftp.aladdin.com/pub/hasp/Sentinel_HASP/Runtime_%28Drivers%29/Sentinel_HASP_Run-time_setup.zip

Locate and open the downloaded file on your computer. Double-click "HaspUserSetup.exe" andselect Run to install the drivers.

License key is plugged in locally but a "404" error appears whenaccessing the HASP™ Admin Control Center

If your license key is plugged into your physical machine and your browser returns a "404" (page notfound) error when you click the Sentinel HASP Admin Control Center button in the CEI Portal, youmay need to install the HASP drivers. Follow the instructions above to do so.

Advanced Troubleshooting - HASP™ ACC configuration& Firewalls

The primary functionality available within the ACC is the configuration of access to CEI's FlexLicense Keys. By default, the keyswill "broadcast" licenses to all systems on a network so anysystem on that network with CEI software and the Sentinel HASP driver installed will be capable ofusing the licenses. In a large network with multiple sub-networks or in the case of users remoteaccessing the network, additional configurationmay be necessary.

Click the Sentinel HASP™ Admin Control Center (ACC) button at the bottom of the CEI Portal; onthe page that loads, select Configuration from the Administration Options.

270 | Page

Page 283: Design Calc s Manual

License Troubleshooting

To connect to a license on another machine, select the Access to Remote LicenseManagers tab."Allow Access to Remote Licenses" and "Broadcast Search for Remote Licenses" should beselected. Select "Aggressive Search for Remote Licenses" to allow access to licenses blocked byfirewalls.

Enter the IP address of the systemwhich has the physical key plugged into it. Press Enter and thentype themachine name of that computer. Once the desired changes have beenmade, click Submit.

Hardware and software firewalls should be checked to verify that Port 1947 is open and accessibleaswell.

271 | Page

Page 284: Design Calc s Manual

272 | Page

F ILE EXTENSION T IPS

This article lists the file extensions for the CEI programs that use a flat file system (instead of a singlefile database) and gives themost common/default location for the files. Your settingsmay place yourfiles elsewhere.

DesignCalcs

*.DesignCalcs - Vessel files are stored with this extension. They are often located in C:\CEIData\DesignCalcs

DcSupport.adb - This is a supporting database that is often located in C:\CEI Data\DesignCalcs

DesignDocs

*.DesignDocs - Design files are stored with this extension. These files are often located in theMyDocuments folder.

WeldDocs

The following file types are used for WeldDocs files. These files are often located in theMyDocuments folder.

*.welder *.BS_EN_ISO_15609_1

*.API1104 *.BS_EN_281_1

*.AWS_D1_1_PQR *.Section9WPS

*.AWS_D1_1_WPS *.Section9WPQ

*.AWS_D1_1_WPQ *.Section9WOPQ

*BS_EN_ISO_15614_1 *.Section9PQR

Page 285: Design Calc s Manual

File Extension Tips

WeldToolbox

The following file types are used for WeldToolbox files. These files are often located in theMyDocuments folder.

*.wtcad *.bmp

*.whclc *.wtest

Temporary Folder

Occasionally a programwill use theWindows Temp folder to store files (e.g., ProWrite exporttables). This location typically looks like C:\Users\[user name]\AppData\Local\temp.

273 | Page